Toyota OM52D73U
User Manual: Toyota 2014 Toyota Prius C Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 563 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
1Before driving Information on the hybrid system and adjusting and op-
erating features such as door locks, mirrors, and steer-
ing column.
2When driving Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.
3Interior
features Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other in-
terior features for a comfortable driving experience.
4Maintenance
and care Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-
yourself maintenance, and maintenance information.
5When trouble
arises What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat
tire, or is involved in an accident.
6Vehicle
specifications Detailed vehicle information.
7For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, seat belt and
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners.
Index Alphabetical listing of information contained in this
manual.
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
2
1-1. Hybrid system
Hybrid system features ........ 24
Hybrid system
precautions ........................ 29
Energy monitor/
consumption screen........... 35
Hybrid vehicle driving tips .... 42
1-2. Key information
Keys ..................................... 44
1-3. Opening, closing and
locking the doors
Smart key system................. 47
Wireless remote control ....... 61
Side doors............................ 65
Back door............................. 71
1-4. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors,
steering wheel)
Front seats ........................... 76
Rear seats............................ 77
Head restraints..................... 81
Seat belts ............................. 84
Steering wheel ..................... 93
Anti-glare inside rear view
mirror.................................. 94
Outside rear view mirrors ..... 96
1-5. Opening and closing the
windows and moon roof
Power windows .................... 98
Moon roof........................... 101
1-6. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank
cap.................................... 105
1-7. Theft deterrent system
Immobilizer system............. 110
Theft prevention labels ....... 113
1-8. Safety information
Correct driving posture ....... 114
SRS airbags ....................... 116
Front passenger occupant
classification system......... 130
Child restraint systems ....... 136
Installing child restraints ..... 140
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle .............. 150
Engine (ignition) switch....... 160
Power (ignition) switch........ 164
EV drive mode.................... 172
Hybrid transmission............ 175
Turn signal lever................. 178
Parking brake ..................... 179
Horn.................................... 180
1Before driving
2When driving
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
3
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters ............ 181
Indicators and warning
lights ................................. 184
Multi-information display ..... 187
2-3. Operating the lights and
wipers
Headlight switch.................. 204
Fog light switch ................... 208
Windshield wipers and
washer .............................. 210
Rear window wiper and
washer .............................. 214
2-4. Using other driving
systems
Cruise control...................... 217
Driving assist systems ........ 221
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage ............. 226
Vehicle load limits ............... 230
Winter driving tips ............... 231
Trailer towing ...................... 235
Dinghy towing ..................... 236
3-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Automatic air
conditioning system.......... 238
Rear window and outside
rear view mirror
defoggers ......................... 247
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system types ............ 248
Using the radio ................... 254
Using the CD player ........... 256
Playing back MP3 and
WMA discs ....................... 261
Operating an iPod .............. 268
Operating a USB
memory ............................ 276
Optimal use of the audio
system.............................. 284
Using the AUX port............. 287
Using the steering wheel
audio switches.................. 288
3-3. Using the Bluetooth®
audio system
Bluetooth® audio/phone ..... 291
Using the Bluetooth®
audio/phone ..................... 295
Operating a Bluetooth®
enabled portable player.... 300
Making a phone call ........... 303
Using the “SET UP” menu
(“Bluetooth” menu) ........... 308
Using the “SET UP” menu
(“Phone” menu)................ 314
3Interior features
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
4
3-4. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list ................. 321
• Interior lights/
personal lights.................. 322
3-5. Using the storage features
List of storage features....... 324
• Glove box......................... 325
• Console box..................... 325
• Auxiliary boxes................. 327
• Cup holders...................... 329
• Bottle holders................... 330
3-6. Other interior features
Sun visors .......................... 332
Vanity mirrors ..................... 333
Outside temperature
display.............................. 334
Power outlet ....................... 336
Seat heaters....................... 337
Coat hooks......................... 339
Assist grips......................... 340
Floor mat............................ 341
Luggage cover ................... 343
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior ........... 346
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior ............ 349
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements .................... 352
General maintenance ......... 355
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs .......................... 359
4-3. Do-it-yourself
maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions....................... 360
Hood................................... 364
Positioning a floor jack........ 366
Engine compartment .......... 368
12-volt battery..................... 379
Tires.................................... 384
Tire inflation pressure......... 392
Wheels................................ 396
Air conditioning filter ........... 399
Wireless remote control/
electronic key battery ....... 401
Checking and replacing
fuses................................. 404
Light bulbs .......................... 415
4Maintenance and care
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
5
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers ............ 428
If your vehicle needs to
be towed ........................... 429
If you think something
is wrong ............................ 436
5-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If a warning light turns
on or a warning buzzer
sounds .............................. 437
If a warning message is
displayed........................... 447
If you have a flat tire............ 463
If the hybrid system will
not start............................. 475
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P.................... 477
If you lose your keys ........... 478
If the electronic key does
not operate properly.......... 479
If the vehicle 12-volt battery
is discharged..................... 481
If your vehicle overheats..... 487
If the vehicle becomes
stuck ................................. 492
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an
emergency........................ 493
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.) ........... 496
Fuel information.................. 506
Tire information .................. 509
6-2. Customization
Customizable features........ 522
Items to initialize................. 528
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners ................ 530
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)........................ 531
SRS airbag instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)........................ 533
Abbreviation list......................... 544
Alphabetical index ..................... 546
What to do if... ........................... 558
5When trouble arises 6Vehicle specifications
7For owners
Index
6
Pictorial index Exterior
Outside rear view mirrors
P. 96
Front turn signal lights
P. 178
Front side marker lights
P. 204
Hood
P. 364
Front fog lights
P. 208
Side turn signal lights
P. 178
Parking lights
P. 204
Headlights (low beam)
P. 204
Headlights (high beam) and
daytime running lights
P. 204
Windshield wipers
P. 210
8
Pictorial index Interior
SRS driver airbag
P. 116
Front seats
SRS seat cushion
airbags
P. 76
P. 116
SRS side airbags
P. 116
SRS front passenger
airbag
P. 116
Luggage cover
P. 343
Seat belts
P. 84
Head restraints
P. 81
Power window
switches
P. 98
SRS driver knee
airbag
P. 116
Console box
Auxiliary box
Cup holder
P. 325
P. 327
P. 329
Rear seats
P. 77
12
Pictorial index Instrument panel
Hood lock release lever
P. 364
Gauges and meters
Multi-information display
P. 181
P. 187
Glove box
P. 325
Fuel filler door opener
P. 105
Tire pressure warning reset switch
P. 385
AUX port/USB port
P. 268, 276, 287
Power outlet
P. 336
Power (ignition) switch (vehicles with
a smart key system)
P. 160
Tilt and telescopic steering lock release lever
P. 93
Audio system
Display Audio system , *
P. 248
Emergency flasher switch
P. 428
Headlight switch
P. 204
Turn signal lever
P. 178
Fog light switch
P. 208
Floor mat
P. 341
Cord hook
P. 272
Windshield wiper and washer switch
Rear window wiper and washer switch
P. 210
P. 214
14
B
Pictorial index Instrument panel
Cruise control switch
P. 217
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles without a smart key
system)
P. 160
Audio remote control
switches
P. 288
Talk switch , *1
Telephone switches , *2
P. 296
Horn
P. 180
Climate remote control switches
P. 243
“DISP” switch
P. 188
“TRIP” switch
P. 188
16
For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Please note that this manual applies to all models and all equipment, includ-
ing options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not
installed on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing.
However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we
reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ
from your vehicle in terms of equipment.
Noise from under vehicle after turning off the hybrid system
Approximately five hours after the hybrid system is turned off, you may hear
sound coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound
of a fuel evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota
vehicles are currently available on the market. You should know that Toyota
does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their
performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to,
or adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Toyota products.
Modification with non-genuine Toyota products could affect its performance,
safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In
addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification
may not be covered under warranty.
17
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect
electronic systems such as:
●Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
●Cruise control system
●Anti-lock brake system
●SRS airbag system
●Seat belt pretensioner system
Be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or spe-
cial instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.
High voltage parts and cables on the hybrid vehicles emit approximately the
same amount of electromagnetic waves as the conventional gasoline pow-
ered vehicles or home electronic appliances despite of their electromagnetic
shielding.
Unwanted noise may occur in the reception of the mobile two-way radio.
18
Vehicle data recordings
Your Toyota is equipped with several sophisticated computers that will record
certain data, such as:
• Engine speed
•Electric motor speed (traction motor speed)
• Accelerator status
• Brake status
• Vehicle speed
• Shift position
• Hybrid battery (traction battery) status
The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options
with which it is equipped. Furthermore, these computers do not record con-
versations, sounds or pictures.
●Data usage
Toyota may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunc-
tions, conduct research and development, and improve quality.
Toyota
will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:
• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if
the vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a govern-
ment agency
• For use by Toyota in a law suit
• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or
vehicle owner
Event data recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main pur-
pose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed
to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
19
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fas-
tened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake
pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situ-
ation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access
to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can
read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
●Disclosure of the EDR data
Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except
when:
• An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle)
is obtained
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a govern-
ment agency
• For use by Toyota in a law suit
However, if necessary, Toyota may:
• Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance
• Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing
information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner
20
Scrapping of your Toyota
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain
explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt
pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be
sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner
removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Toyota
dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These compo-
nents may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote con-
trol batteries.
CAUTION
■General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influ-
ence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehi-
cle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and
reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in
death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other
drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that dis-
tracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or
reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you,
your occupants or others.
■General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to
have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.
There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with
the cigarette lighter, the windows, or other features of the vehicle. In addi-
tion, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be
fatal to children.
21
CAUTION
■Hybrid battery (traction battery)
Never resell, hand over or modify the hybrid battery. To prevent accidents,
hybrid batteries that have been removed from a disposed vehicle are col-
lected through Toyota dealers. Do not dispose of the battery yourself.
Unless the battery is properly collected, the following may occur, resulting in
death or serious injury:
●The hybrid battery may be illegally disposed of or dumped, and someone
may touch a high voltage part, resulting in an electric shock.
●The hybrid battery is intended to be used exclusively with your hybrid vehi-
cle. If the hybrid battery is used outside of your vehicle or modified in any
way, accidents such as electric shock, heat generation, smoke generation,
an explosion and electrolyte leakage may occur.
When reselling or handing over your vehicle, the possibility of an accident is
extremely high because the person receiving the vehicle may not be aware
of these dangers.
■Disposal of the hybrid battery (traction battery)
If your vehicle is disposed of without the hybrid battery having been
removed, there is a danger of serious electric shock if high voltage parts,
cables and their connectors are touched. In the event that your vehicle must
be disposed of, the hybrid battery must be disposed of by your Toyota dealer
or a qualified service shop. If the hybrid battery is not disposed of properly, it
may cause electric shock that can result in death or serious injury.
22
Symbols used throughout this manual
Cautions & Notices
Symbols used in illustrations
CAUTION
This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause death or
serious injury to people. You are informed about what you must or must not do
in order to reduce the risk of death or serious injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause damage to
the vehicle or its equipment. You are informed about what you must or must
not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Toyota and its
equipment.
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”, “Do
not do this”, or “Do not let this happen”.
Arrows indicating operations
Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.)
used to operate switches and other devices.
Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g. a
lid opens).
23
Before driving 1
23
1-1. Hybrid system
Hybrid system features ...... 24
Hybrid system
precautions ...................... 29
Energy monitor/
consumption screen......... 35
Hybrid vehicle driving
tips ................................... 42
1-2. Key information
Keys................................... 44
1-3. Opening, closing and
locking the doors
Smart key system .............. 47
Wireless remote control ..... 61
Side doors.......................... 65
Back door........................... 71
1-4. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors,
steering wheel)
Front seats......................... 76
Rear seats.......................... 77
Head restraints................... 81
Seat belts........................... 84
Steering wheel ................... 93
Anti-glare inside rear
view mirror ....................... 94
Outside rear
view mirrors ..................... 96
1-5. Opening and closing the
windows and moon roof
Power windows.................. 98
Moon roof......................... 101
1-6. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank
cap ................................. 105
1-7. Theft deterrent system
Immobilizer system .......... 110
Theft prevention labels..... 113
1-8. Safety information
Correct driving posture..... 114
SRS airbags..................... 116
Front passenger
occupant classification
system ........................... 130
Child restraint systems..... 136
Installing child
restraints ........................ 140
24
1-1. Hybrid system
Hybrid system features
Your vehicle is a hybrid vehicle. It has characteristics different from
conventional vehicles. Be sure you are closely familiar with the char-
acteristics of your vehicle, and operate with care.
The hybrid system combines the use of a gasoline engine and an
electric motor (traction motor) according to driving conditions,
improving fuel efficiency and reducing exhaust emissions.
Gasoline engine
Electric motor (Traction motor)
25
1-1. Hybrid system
1
Before driving
Vehicle Proximity Notification System
When the gasoline engine is off while driving, a sound is produced to
warn pedestrians, people riding bicycles or other people and vehicles
in the surrounding area that the vehicle is approaching. The pitch of
the sound adjusts according to vehicle speed. When vehicle speed is
approximately 16 mph (25 km/h) or more, the warning system turns
off.
■When stopped/during start off
The gasoline engine stops* when the vehicle is stopped. During
start-off, the electric motor (traction motor) drives the vehicle. At
slow speeds or when traveling down a gentle slope, the engine
is stopped* and the motor is used.
*: However, when the hybrid battery (traction battery) needs to be
charged or while the engine is being warmed up, the gasoline
engine may not stop automatically. (P. 26)
■During normal driving
The gasoline engine is predominantly used. The electric motor
(traction motor) charges the hybrid battery as necessary.
■When accelerating sharply
The power of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is added to that
of the gasoline engine via the electric motor (traction motor).
■When braking (regenerative braking)
The electric motor (traction motor) charges the hybrid battery
(traction battery).
26
1-1. Hybrid system
■Regenerative braking
In the following situations, kinetic energy is converted to electric energy and
deceleration force can be obtained in conjunction with the recharging of the
hybrid battery (traction battery).
●The accelerator pedal is released with the shift lever in D or B.
●The brake pedal is depressed with the shift lever in D or B.
■EV drive indicator lamp
■Conditions in which the gasoline engine may not stop
The gasoline engine starts and stops automatically. However, it may not stop
automatically in the following conditions:
●During gasoline engine warm-up
●During hybrid battery (traction battery) charging
●When the temperature of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is high or
low
●When the heater is switched on
The EV drive indicator lamp comes on
when the vehicle is driven using only the
electric motor (traction motor) or the gas-
oline engine is stopped.
Displayed when “ECO Score” or the
basic display of “ECO Savings” is
selected. (P. 191)
27
1-1. Hybrid system
1
Before driving
■Charging the hybrid battery (traction battery)
●As the gasoline engine charges the hybrid battery (traction battery), the
battery does not need to be charged from an outside source. However, if
the vehicle is left parked for a long time the hybrid battery will slowly dis-
charge. For this reason, be sure to drive the vehicle at least once every
few months for at least 30 minutes or 10 miles (16 km). If the hybrid bat-
tery becomes fully discharged and you are unable to jump-start the vehi-
cle with the 12-volt battery, contact your Toyota dealer.
●If the shift lever is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will not be
charged. Always put the shift lever in P when the vehicle is stopped.
When driving in heavy traffic, operate the vehicle with the shift lever in D
or B to avoid discharging the battery.
■Charging the 12-volt battery
P. 484
■After the 12-volt battery has discharged or has been changed or
removed
The gasoline engine may not stop even if the vehicle is running on the hybrid
battery (traction battery). If this continues for a few days, contact your Toyota
dealer.
28
1-1. Hybrid system
■Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle
There may be no engine sounds or vibration even though the vehicle is able
to move. For safety, apply the parking brake and make sure to shift the shift
lever to P when parked.
The following sounds or vibrations may occur when the hybrid system is
operating and are not a malfunction:
●Motor sounds may be heard from the engine compartment.
●Sounds may be heard from the hybrid battery (traction battery) behind
the rear seats when the hybrid system starts or stops.
●Sounds from the hybrid system may be heard when the back door is
open.
●Sounds may be heard from the transmission when the gasoline engine
starts or stops, when driving at low speeds, or during idling.
●Engine sounds may be heard when accelerating sharply.
●Sounds may be heard due to regenerative braking when the brake pedal
is depressed.
●Vibration may be felt when the gasoline engine starts or stops.
●Cooling fan sounds may be heard from the air intake vent on the side of
the lower part of the rear left seat.
■Vehicle Proximity Notification System
In the following cases, the Vehicle Proximity Notification System sound may
be difficult for pedestrians, people riding bicycles or other people and vehi-
cles in the surrounding area to hear:
●When there is a lot of noise in the vicinity
●When it is raining or during strong winds
●When in the area surrounding the rear of the vehicle, rather than in front
of the vehicle
■Maintenance, repair, recycling, and disposal
Contact your Toyota dealer regarding maintenance, repair, recycling and dis-
posal. Do not dispose of the vehicle yourself.
■Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e. g. the volume of Vehicle Proximity Notification System sound)
can be changed. (Customizable features: P. 522)
29
1
1-1. Hybrid system
Before driving
Hybrid system precautions
Take care when handling the hybrid system, as it contains a high
voltage system (about 520 V at maximum) as well as parts that
become extremely hot when the hybrid system is operating. Obey
the caution labels attached to the vehicle.
Caution label
Service plug
Air conditioning compressor
Electric motor (traction motor)
Power control unit with DC/
DC converter
Hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery)
High voltage cables (orange)
30
1-1. Hybrid system
Hybrid battery air vent
There is an air intake vent on the
side of the lower part of the rear
left seat for the purpose of cool-
ing the hybrid battery (traction
battery). If the vent becomes
blocked, the hybrid battery may
overheat, leading to a reduction
in hybrid battery output.
Emergency shut off system
When a certain level of impact is detected by the impact sensor, the
emergency shut off system blocks off the high voltage current and
stops the fuel pump to minimize the risk of electrocution and fuel
leakage. If the emergency shut off system activates, your vehicle will
not restart. To restart the hybrid system, contact your Toyota dealer.
Hybrid warning message
A message is automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in
the hybrid system or an improper operation is attempted.
If a warning message is shown
on the multi-information display,
read the message and follow the
instructions. (P. 447)
31
1-1. Hybrid system
1
Before driving
■If a warning light comes on, a warning message is displayed, or the 12-
volt battery has been disconnected
The hybrid system may not start. In that case, try to start the system again. If
the “READY” indicator does not come on, contact your Toyota dealer.
■Running out of fuel
When the vehicle has run out of fuel and the hybrid system cannot be
started, refuel the vehicle with at least enough gasoline to make the low fuel
level warning light (P. 439) stop flashing. If there is only a small amount of
fuel, the hybrid system may not be able to start. (The minimum amount of
fuel to add to make the low fuel level warning light stop flashing is about 1.3
gal. [5.0 L, 1.1 Imp. gal.] when the vehicle is on a level surface. This value
may vary when the vehicle is on a slope.)
■Electromagnetic waves
●High voltage parts and cables on the hybrid vehicles incorporate electro-
magnetic shielding, and therefore emit approximately the same amount
of electromagnetic waves as conventional gasoline powered vehicles or
home electronic appliances.
●Your vehicle may cause sound interference in some third party-produced
radio parts.
■Hybrid battery (traction battery)
The hybrid battery (traction battery) has a limited service life. The lifespan of
the hybrid battery (traction battery) can change in accordance with driving
style and driving conditions.
32
1-1. Hybrid system
CAUTION
■High voltage and high temperature precautions
The vehicle has high voltage DC and AC systems as well as a 12-volt sys-
tem. DC and AC high voltage is very dangerous and can cause severe burns
and electric shock that may result in death or serious injury.
●Never touch, disassemble, remove or replace the high voltage parts,
cables or their connectors.
●The hybrid system will become hot after starting as the system uses high
voltage. Be careful of both the high voltage and the high temperature, and
always obey the caution labels attached to the vehicle.
●Never try to open the service plug
access hole located under the rear
seat. The service plug is used only
when the vehicle is serviced and is sub-
ject to high voltage.
33
1-1. Hybrid system
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Road accident cautions
If your vehicle is involved in an accident, observe the following precautions
to reduce the risk of death or serious injury:
●Stop the vehicle in a safe place to prevent subsequent accidents, shift the
shift lever to P, apply the parking brake, and turn the hybrid system off.
(P. 150)
●Do not touch the high voltage parts, cables or connectors. Carefully check
to see if there are exposed high voltage parts or cables.
●If electric wires are exposed inside or outside your vehicle, an electric
shock may occur. Never touch exposed electric wires.
●If a fluid leak occurs, do not touch the fluid as it may be strong alkaline
electrolyte from the hybrid battery (traction battery). If it comes into contact
with your skin or eyes, wash it off immediately with a large amount of water
or, if possible, boric acid solution. Seek immediate medical attention.
●If a fire occurs in the hybrid vehicle, leave the vehicle as soon as possible.
Never use a fire extinguisher that is not meant for electric fires. Using even
a small amount of water may be dangerous.
●If your vehicle needs to be towed, do so with the front wheels raised. If the
wheels connected to the electric motor (traction motor) are on the ground
when towing, the motor may continue to generate electricity. This may
cause a fire. (P. 429)
●Carefully inspect the ground under the vehicle. If you find that liquid has
leaked onto the ground, the fuel system may have been damaged. Leave
the vehicle as soon as possible and contact your Toyota dealer.
■Nickel-metal hydride battery
Your vehicle contains a sealed nickel-metal hydride battery. If disposed of
improperly, it is hazardous to the environment and there is a risk of severe
burns and electrical shock that may result in death or serious injury.
34
1-1. Hybrid system
NOTICE
■Hybrid battery air vent
●Do not place foreign objects over or in front of the air vent. The hybrid bat-
tery (traction battery) may overheat and be damaged.
●Clean the air vent regularly to prevent the hybrid battery (traction battery)
from overheating.
●Do not wet the air vent as this may cause a short circuit and damage the
hybrid battery (traction battery).
●Do not carry large amounts of water such as water cooler bottles in the
vehicle. If water spills onto the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery
may be damaged.
35
1
1-1. Hybrid system
Before driving
Energy monitor/consumption screen
Energy monitor
Display Audio system (if equipped)
Press “CAR”.
If the “Trip Information” is dis-
played, touch “Energy”.
Multi-information display
Push the “DISP” switch on the
steering wheel several times to
select the energy monitor dis-
play.
You can view the status of your hybrid system on the multi-informa-
tion display and Display Audio system.
Display Audio system (if
equipped)
Multi-information display
36
1-1. Hybrid system
Display Audio system Multi-information
display
When the vehi-
cle is powered
by the electric
motor (traction
motor)
When the vehi-
cle is powered
by the gasoline
engine
When the vehi-
cle is powered
by both the gas-
oline engine and
the electric
motor (traction
motor)
When the vehi-
cle is charging
the hybrid bat-
tery (traction
battery)
When there is
no energy flow
37
1-1. Hybrid system
1
Before driving
These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual condi-
tions.
Hybrid battery
(traction bat-
tery) status Low Full Low Full
Display Audio system Multi-information
display
38
1-1. Hybrid system
Trip Information screen (Display Audio system)
Press “CAR”. (P. 35)
If the “Energy Monitor” screen is displayed, touch “Trip Information”.
Fuel consumption in the past
15 minutes
Displays the average vehicle
speed since the hybrid system
was started.
Displays the driving time since
the hybrid system was started.
Cruising range
Regenerated energy in the
past 15 minutes
One symbol indicates 50 Wh.
Up to 5 symbols are shown.
The image is example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.
39
1-1. Hybrid system
1
Before driving
Fuel consumption screen (Multi-information display)
There are 2 menu items available for the fuel consumption screen.
After pressing the “DISP” switch, select one of the menu items below
and the system will change to the details screen.
The “5min Consumption”, “Past Record” and “ECO Savings Record”
(P. 196) screens are set to off (initialized settings) at the time of
shipping. (P. 41)
■“5min Consumption” screen
Displays the fuel consumption his-
tory since the hybrid system was
started in intervals of 5 minutes.
Current fuel consumption is simul-
taneously displayed, enabling it to
be compared with fuel consump-
tion of up to the last 30 minutes.
40
1-1. Hybrid system
■“Past Record”
There are 2 types of displays for the past record.
Personal best and monthly average can be changed between on the
settings screen. (P. 41)
Personal Best
Displays the best 3 fuel consumption records and the current fuel
consumption ranking.
Depending on whether the odometer or trip meter is displayed, the
displayed contents differ.
●When the odometer is displayed: the record since the hybrid
system was started is displayed.
●When the trip meter is displayed: the record since the trip meter
was reset is displayed. The record for trip meter A and trip meter
B is displayed separately.
The top 100 rankings are displayed. Records that are outside the top 100
are not displayed as a ranking.
Fuel consumption data for trips of less than 0.1 miles are not recorded.
Monthly Average
Displays average fuel consumption by the month.
The current month, the last 3 months and the same month last year are
displayed, enabling a comparison to be made.
The past record can be reset on the settings screen. (P. 41)
41
1-1. Hybrid system
1
Before driving
■Remaining hybrid battery (traction battery) charge display
The charge amount of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is automatically
controlled by the hybrid system. For this reason, even if electricity is recov-
ered via the regenerative braking, or electricity is generated via the gasoline
engine, the displayed hybrid battery (traction battery) charge amount may
not reach the highest level (level 8). However, this does not indicate a mal-
function.
■Resetting the consumption data (Display Audio System)
Selecting “Clear” on the “Trip Information” screen will reset the fuel con-
sumption and the regenerated energy for the past 15 minutes. Selecting
“Yes” on the following screen will confirm resetting of all the data.
■Menu screen selection (Multi-information display)
Press the “DISP” switch and select “Set-
tings & Screen Off”. Press and hold the
“DISP” switch while the cursor is on
“Menu Screen Selection” to change to the
settings screen.
The following screen changes and set-
tings can be performed:
• The eco savings record screen can be
switched on or off. (P. 187)
• The 5 minute fuel consumption screen
can be switched on or off.
• Past record can be reset.
• The past record screen can be
switched between off, monthly aver-
age and personal best.
42
1-1. Hybrid system
Hybrid vehicle driving tips
For economical and ecological driving, pay attention to the following
points:
■Using Eco drive mode
P. 176
■Use of Hybrid System Indicator
By keeping Hybrid System Indicator within Eco area, more Eco-friendly
driving may be possible. (P. 197)
■When braking the vehicle
Make sure to operate the brakes gently and in good time. A greater
amount of electrical energy can be retained when slowing down.
■Delays
Repeated acceleration and deceleration, as well as long waits at traffic
lights, will lead to bad fuel consumption. Check traffic reports before
leaving and avoid delays as much as possible. When encountering a
delay, gently release the brake pedal to allow the vehicle to move for-
ward slightly while avoiding overuse of the accelerator pedal. Doing so
can help control excessive gasoline consumption.
■Highway driving
Control your speed and keep at a constant speed. Also, before stop-
ping at a toll booth or similar, allow plenty of time to release the acceler-
ator and gently apply the brakes. A greater amount of electrical energy
can be retained when slowing down.
■Air conditioning
Use the air conditioning only when necessary. Doing so can help con-
trol excessive gasoline consumption.
In summer: In high temperatures, use the recirculated air mode. Doing
so will help to reduce the burden on the air conditioning and reduce fuel
consumption as well.
In winter: Because the gasoline engine will not automatically cut out
until the gasoline engine and the interior of the vehicle are warm, it will
consume fuel. Also, fuel consumption can be improved by avoiding
overuse of the heater.
43
1-1. Hybrid system
1
Before driving
■Checking tire inflation pressure
Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure frequently. Improper tire
inflation pressure can cause poor fuel consumption.
Also, as snow tires can cause large amounts of friction, their use on dry
roads can lead to poor fuel consumption. Use a tire that is appropriate
for the season.
■Luggage
Carrying heavy luggage can lead to poor fuel consumption. Avoid car-
rying unnecessary luggage. Installing a large roof rack can also cause
poor fuel consumption.
■Warming up before driving
Since the gasoline engine starts up and cuts out automatically when
cold, warming up the engine is unnecessary. Moreover, frequently driv-
ing short distances will cause the engine to repeatedly warm up, which
can lead to poor fuel consumption.
44
1-2. Key information
Keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Vehicles without a smart key system (vehicles without immo-
bilizer system)
Master keys
Operating the wireless remote
control function (P. 61)
Valet key
Key number plate
Vehicles without a smart key system (vehicles with immobi-
lizer system)
Master keys
Operating the wireless remote
control function (P. 61)
Valet key
Key number plate
Vehicles with a smart key system
Electronic keys
• Operating the smart key
system (P. 47)
• Operating the wireless
remote control function
(P. 61)
Mechanical keys
Key number plate
45
1-2. Key information
1
Before driving
Using the mechanical key (vehicles with a smart key system)
To take out the mechanical key,
slide the release lever and take
the key out.
The mechanical key can only be
inserted in one direction, as the
key only has grooves on one
side. If the key cannot be inserted
in a lock cylinder, turn it over and
re-attempt to insert it.
After using the mechanical key,
store it in the electronic key. Carry
the mechanical key together with
the electronic key. If the electronic
key battery is depleted or the
entry function does not operate
properly, you will need the
mechanical key. (P. 479)
■Key number plate
Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the
event that a key (without a smart key system) or mechanical key (with a
smart key system) is lost, a new key can be made by your Toyota dealer
using the key number plate. (P. 478)
■When riding in an aircraft
When bringing a key with wireless remote control function onto an aircraft,
make sure you do not press any buttons on the key while inside the aircraft
cabin. If you are carrying the key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons
are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the
key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.
46
1-2. Key information
NOTICE
■To prevent key damage
Observe the following:
●Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.
●Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for long periods of time.
●Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.
●Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys
close to such materials.
●Do not disassemble the keys.
●Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the key.
●Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as
TVs, audio systems and induction cookers, or medical electrical equip-
ment, such as low-frequency therapy equipment.
■Carrying the electronic key on your person (vehicles with a smart key
system)
Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from electric appli-
ances that are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances
within 3.9 in. (10 cm) of the electronic key may interfere with the key, causing
the key to not function properly.
■In case of a smart key system malfunction or other key-related prob-
lems (vehicles with a smart key system)
Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle to
your Toyota dealer.
■When a vehicle key is lost (vehicles with a smart key system)
If the key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit
your Toyota dealer immediately with all remaining electronic keys that was
provided with your vehicle.
47
1
Before driving
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Smart key system
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the
electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket.
(The driver should always carry the electronic key.)
Unlocks and locks the side doors (P. 48)
Unlocks and locks the back door (P. 49)
Starts the hybrid system (P. 164)
Electronic key
Electronic key Electronic key
: If equipped
48
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Unlocking and locking the doors (front door handles only)
Grip the driver’s door handle to
unlock the door.* (Grip the pas-
senger’s door handle to unlock
all doors.)
Make sure to touch the sensor on
the back of the handle.
The doors cannot be unlocked for
3 seconds after the doors are
locked.
*: The door unlock settings can be
changed. (P. 53)
Touch the lock sensor (the
indentation on the side of the
door handle) to lock the doors.
Check that the door is securely
locked.
49
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
Unlocking and locking the back door
Press the button to unlock the
back door.
The door cannot be unlocked for
3 seconds after the door is
locked.
Press the button to lock the back
door.
Check that the door is securely
locked.
50
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Antenna location and effective range
■Antenna location
Antennas inside the cabin
Antennas outside the cabin
Antenna outside the luggage
compartment
51
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
■Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is
detected)
When locking or unlocking
the doors
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of
an outside door handle.
(Only the doors detecting the
key can be operated.)
When starting the hybrid
system or changing
“POWER” switch modes
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
inside the vehicle.
■Operation signals
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors
have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)
52
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor on the surface of
the door handle
■Alarms and warning indicators
A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warning messages
shown on the multi-information display is used to prevent theft of the vehicle
and accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate mea-
sures in response to any warning message on the multi-information display.
(P. 447)
The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures
when only alarms are sounded.
■Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again. (How-
ever, depending on the location of the electronic key, the key may be
detected as being in the vehicle. In this case, vehicle may be unlocked.)
Use your palm to touch the lock sensor.
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Exterior alarm
sounds once for
5 seconds
An attempt was made to
lock the vehicle while a
door was open.
Close all of the doors
and lock the doors
again.
Interior alarm
sounds continu-
ously
The “POWER” switch was
turned to ACCESSORY
mode while the driver's
door was open (or the
driver's door was opened
when the “POWER” switch
was in ACCESSORY
mode.)
Turn the “POWER”
switch off and close
the driver’s door.
53
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
■Switching the door unlock function
It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks using the wireless
remote control.
Turn the “POWER” switch off.
When the indicator light on the key surface is not on, press and
hold or for about 5 seconds while pressing and holding
.
The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below.
(When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at
least 5 seconds, and repeat step 2.)
■Battery-saving function
The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the elec-
tronic key battery and the 12-volt battery from being discharged while the
vehicle is not in operation for a long time.
●In the following situations, the smart key system may take some time to
unlock the doors.
• The electronic key has been left in an area of approximately 6 ft. (2 m)
of the outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or longer.
• The smart key system has not been used for 5 days or longer.
●If the smart key system has not been used for 14 days or longer, the
doors cannot be unlocked at any of the doors except the driver’s door. In
this case, take hold of the driver’s door handle, or use the wireless
remote control or the mechanical key, to unlock the doors.
STEP
1
STEP
2
Unlocking doors Beep
Holding the driver's door handle
unlocks only the driver's door. Exterior: Beeps 3 times
Interior: Beeps once
Holding the front passenger’s door
handle unlocks all the doors.
Holding either front door handle
unlocks all the doors.
Exterior: Beeps twice
Interior: Beeps once
54
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■Electronic key battery-saving function
When battery-saving mode is set, battery depletion is minimized by stopping
the electronic key from receiving radio waves.
Press twice while pressing and
holding . Confirm that the electronic
key indicator flashes 4 times.
While the battery-saving mode is set, the
smart key system cannot be used. To
cancel the function, press any of the elec-
tronic key buttons.
55
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
■Conditions affecting operation
The smart key system uses weak radio waves. In the following situations,
the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be
affected, preventing the smart key system, wireless remote control and
immobilizer system from operating properly.
(Ways of coping: P. 479)
●When the electronic key battery is depleted
●Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large dis-
play, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electri-
cal noise
●When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following
metallic objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
●When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby
●When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that
emit radio waves
• A portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless com-
munication device
• Another vehicle’s electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio
waves
• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)
• Digital audio players
• Portable game systems
●If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to
the rear window
●When the electronic key is placed near a battery charger or electronic
devices
56
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■Notes for the entry function
●Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection
areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases:
• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle,
near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or
unlocked.
• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, luggage cover or floor, in
the door pockets or glove box when the hybrid system is started or
“POWER” switch modes are changed.
●Do not exit the vehicle with the electronic key placed on the instrument
panel or near the door pockets. Depending on the radio wave reception
conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the
door will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the elec-
tronic key inside the vehicle.
●As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may
be locked or unlocked by anyone.
●Whether or not the electronic key is inside the vehicle, the hybrid system
could be started if the electronic key is near the window.
●The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door
handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash when the electronic key is
within the effective range. (The door will automatically be locked after
approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)
●The lock and unlock sensors may not work properly if they come into
contact with ice, snow, mud, etc. Clean the sensors and attempt to oper-
ate them again.
●If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the elec-
tronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not
be unlocked by the entry function. (Using the wireless remote control to
unlock the doors may resume the function.)
●If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the
effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case,
follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:
• Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the
vehicle. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
• Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart key
system. (P. 54)
57
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
■Notes for locking the doors
●Touching the door lock sensor while wearing gloves may delay or prevent
lock operation. Remove the gloves and touch the lock sensor again.
●When the lock operation is performed using the lock sensor, recognition
signals will be shown up to two consecutive times. After this, no recogni-
tion signals will be given.
●If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet
during a car wash, a buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the
alarm, lock all the doors.
■Notes for the unlocking function
●A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the
doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the
original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door
handle again.
●Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
Remove the gloves and touch the sensor on the back of the handle
again.
●If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly
longer to unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped.
■When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
●To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft.
(2 m) of the vehicle.
●The smart key system can be deactivated in advance. Ask your Toyota
dealer for details.
■To operate the smart key system properly
Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get
the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from
the outside of the vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the
key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly.
(The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may
not operate.)
■If the smart key system does not operate properly
●Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (P. 479)
●Starting the hybrid system:P. 479
58
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■Electronic key battery depletion
●The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.
●If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the
hybrid system stops. (P. 455)
●As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will
become depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The following
symptoms indicate that the electronic key battery may be depleted.
Replace the battery when necessary. (P. 401)
• The smart key system or the wireless remote control does not operate.
• The detection area becomes smaller.
• The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.
●To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft.
(1 m) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:
•TVs
• Personal computers
• Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
• Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
• Induction cookers
• Table lamps
■When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 401
■If the smart key system has been deactivated in a customized setting
●Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the wireless remote control or
mechanical key. (P. 61, 479)
●Starting the hybrid system and changing “POWER” switch modes:
P. 479
●Stopping the hybrid system: P. 480
■Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e. g. operation signals) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 522)
59
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
■Certification for the smart key system
U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQ23AAB
FCC ID: HYQ14FBA
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMLF10-6
FCC ID: NI4TMLF10-7
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Canada
NOTE:
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS stan-
dard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device.
60
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
CAUTION
■Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
●People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization
therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should keep
away from the smart key system antennas. (P. 50)
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary,
the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Toyota dealer for details, such
as the frequency of radio waves and timing of the emitted radio waves.
Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function.
●Users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac
pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implant-
able cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the
device for information about its operation under the influence of radio
waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such
medical devices.
Ask your Toyota dealer for details for disabling the entry function.
61
1
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Before driving
Wireless remote control
The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehi-
cle.
Vehicles without a smart key system
Locks all the doors
Check that the door is securely
locked.
Unlocks all the doors
Pressing the button unlocks
the driver’s door. Pressing the
button again within 5 seconds
unlocks the other doors.
Sounds the alarm
(press and hold)
Vehicles with a smart key system
Locks all the doors
Check that the door is securely
locked.
Unlocks all the doors
Pressing the button unlocks
the driver’s door. Pressing the
button again within 5 seconds
unlocks the other doors.
Sounds the alarm
(press and hold)
62
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■Operation signals
Vehicles without a smart key system
The emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/
unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)
Vehicles with a smart key system
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors
have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)
■
Panic mode
Vehicles without a smart key system
Vehicles with a smart key system
■Door lock buzzer (vehicles with a smart key system)
If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a
buzzer sounds continuously. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock
the vehicle once more.
■Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
When is pressed for longer
than about one second, an alarm will
sound intermittently and the vehicle
lights will flash to deter any person from
trying to break into or damage your
vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on
the wireless remote control.
When is pressed for longer
than about one second, an alarm will
sound intermittently and the vehicle
lights will flash to deter any person from
trying to break into or damage your
vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on
the electronic key.
63
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
■Conditions affecting operation
Vehicles without a smart key system
The wireless remote control function may not operate normally in the follow-
ing situations:
●When the wireless key battery is depleted
●Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large dis-
play, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electri-
cal noise
●When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless commu-
nication device
●When the wireless key is in contact with, or is covered by a metallic
object
●When other wireless keys (that emits radio waves) are being used
nearby
●If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to
the rear window
Vehicles with a smart key system
P. 55
■If the wireless remote control does not operate properly (vehicles with
a smart key system)
Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key.
(P. 479)
■Key battery depletion
Vehicles without a smart key system
If the wireless remote control function does not operate, the battery may be
depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (P. 401)
Vehicles with a smart key system
P. 58
■When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 401
64
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■Confirmation of the registered key number (vehicles with a smart key
system)
The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask
your Toyota dealer for details.
■Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. wireless remote control system) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 522)
■
Certification for wireless remote control
U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQ23AAC
FCC ID: HYQ12BDM
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
65
1
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Before driving
Side doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function,
wireless remote control, key or door lock switch.
■Entry function (if equipped)
P. 47
■Wireless remote control
P. 61
■Key
Turning the key operates the doors as follows:
Vehicles without a smart key system
Locks all the doors
Unlocks all the doors
Driver’s side only: Turning the
key unlocks the driver’s door.
Turning the key again within 5
seconds unlocks the other
doors.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical
key. (P. 479)
■Door lock switch
Locks all the doors
Unlocks all the doors
66
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Locking the front doors from the outside without a key
Move the inside door lock button to the lock position.
Close the door.
Vehicles without a smart key system
The door cannot be locked if either of the front doors is open and
the key is in the engine switch.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The door cannot be locked if the “POWER” switch is in ACCES-
SORY or ON mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle.
The key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.
■Inside lock buttons
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened
by pulling the inside handle
even if the lock buttons are in
the lock position.
STEP
1
STEP
2
67
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
Rear door child-protector lock
The door cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle when the lock
is set.
Unlock
Lock
These locks can be set to prevent
children from opening the rear
doors. Push down on each rear
door switch to lock both rear
doors.
68
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Automatic door locking and unlocking systems
The following functions can be set or canceled:
■Setting and canceling the functions
To switch between setting and canceling, follow the procedure
below:
Vehicles without a smart key system
Close all the doors and turn the engine switch to the “ON”
position. (Perform within 20 seconds.)
Vehicles with a smart key system
Close all the doors and switch the “POWER” switch to ON
mode. (Perform within 20 seconds.)
Function Operation
Shift position linked
door locking function
Shifting the shift lever out of P locks all
doors.
Shift position linked
door unlocking function Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks all doors.
Speed linked door lock-
ing function (vehicles
with a smart key sys-
tem)
All doors are locked when the vehicle speed
is approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or
higher.
Driver’s door linked
door unlocking function
(vehicles without a
smart key system)
All doors are unlocked when the driver’s
door is opened within 45 seconds after turn-
ing the engine switch to “ACC” or “LOCK”.
Driver’s door linked
door unlocking function
(vehicles with a smart
key system)
All doors are unlocked when the driver’s
door is opened within 45 seconds after turn-
ing the “POWER” switch off.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
2
69
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
Shift the shift lever to P or N, and
press and hold the door lock
switch ( or ) for about 5 sec-
onds then release.
The shift position corresponding
to the desired function to be set
are shown as follows.
Use the same procedure to can-
cel the function.
When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all doors are
locked and then unlocked.
STEP
2
Function Shift position Door lock switch
position
Shift position linked door lock-
ing function P
Shift position linked door
unlocking function
Speed linked door locking func-
tion N
Driver’s door linked door unlock-
ing function
■Using the mechanical key (vehicles with a smart key system)
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key.
(P. 479)
■If a wrong key is used (vehicles with a smart key system)
The key cylinder rotates freely to isolate inside mechanism.
■Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 522)
70
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
CAUTION
■To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out,
resulting in death or serious injury.
●Always use a seat belt.
●Always lock all the doors.
●Ensure that all the doors are properly closed.
●Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehi-
cle and it may result in serious injury or death.
Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even
if the inside lock buttons are in locked position.
●Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear
seats.
71
1
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Before driving
Back door
The back door can be locked/unlocked and opened by the following
procedures.
■Locking and unlocking the back door
Wireless remote control
P. 61
Door lock switches
P. 65
Entry function (if equipped)
P. 47
■Opening the back door from outside the vehicle
Raise the back door while
pushing up the back door
opener switch.
The back door cannot be
closed immediately after the
back door opener switch is
pushed.
72
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
When closing the back door
Lower the back door using the
back door handle, and make
sure to push the back door down
from the outside to close it.
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
●Keep the back door closed while driving.
If the back door is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or lug-
gage may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident.
In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a seri-
ous health hazard. Make sure to close the back door before driving.
●Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the back door is fully closed. If
the back door is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving,
causing an accident.
●Never let anyone sit in the luggage compartment. In the event of sudden
braking or a collision, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.
73
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■When children are in the vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Do not allow children to play in the luggage compartment.
If a child is accidentally locked in the luggage compartment, they could
have heat exhaustion or other injuries.
●Do not allow a child to open or close the back door.
Doing so may cause the back door to move unexpectedly, or cause the
child’s hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing back door.
■Operating the back door
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in death
or serious injury.
●Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the back door
before opening it. Failure to do so may cause the back door to suddenly
shut again after it is opened.
●When opening or closing the back door, thoroughly check to make sure
the surrounding area is safe.
●If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that
the back door is about to open or close.
●Use caution when opening or closing the back door in windy weather as it
may move abruptly in strong wind.
74
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
CAUTION
●Do not pull on the back door damper stay to close the back door, and do
not hang on the back door damper stay.
Doing so may cause hands to be caught or the back door damper stay to
break, causing an accident.
●If a bicycle carrier or similar heavy object is attached to the back door, it
may suddenly shut again after being opened, causing someone’s hands,
head or neck to be caught and injured. When installing an accessory part
to the back door, using a genuine Toyota part is recommended.
●The back door may suddenly shut if it is
not opened fully. It is more difficult to
open or close the back door on an
incline than on a level surface, so
beware of the back door unexpectedly
opening or closing by itself. Make sure
that the back door is fully open and
secure before using the luggage com-
partment.
●When closing the back door, take extra
care to prevent your fingers etc. from
being caught.
●When closing the back door, make sure
to press it lightly on its outer surface. If
the back door handle is used to fully
close the back door, it may result in
hands or arms being caught.
75
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
NOTICE
■Back door damper stays
The back door is equipped with damper stays that hold the back door in
place.
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the back door damper stay, resulting
in malfunction.
●Do not attach any foreign objects, such
as stickers, plastic sheets, or adhesives
to the damper stay rod.
●Do not touch the damper stay rod with
gloves or other fabric items.
●Do not attach any accessories other
than genuine Toyota parts to the back
door.
●Do not place your hand on the damper
stay or apply lateral forces to it.
76
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Front seats
CAUTION
■Seat adjustment
●Be careful that the seat does not hit passengers or luggage.
●To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not
recline the seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply
restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the
shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of
an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpect-
edly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
●After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is locked in position.
Seat position adjustment
lever
Seatback angle adjustment
lever
Vertical height adjustment
lever (if equipped)
77
1
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
Rear seats
Folding down the rear seatbacks
■Before folding down the rear seatbacks
Stow the rear seat belt buckles
as shown.
Stow the seat belts.
Center
P. 86
Outside
Use the seat belt hangers to pre-
vent the belts from being tan-
gled.
The seatbacks of the rear seats can be folded down.
STEP
1
STEP
2
78
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Remove the outside head restraints. (P. 81)
Lower the center head restraint to the lowest position.
(P. 81)
■Folding down rear seatbacks
Vehicles with a split rear seats
Pull the seatback lock release
knob and fold the seatback
down.
Each seatback may be folded
separately.
Vehicles with a non-split rear seat
Pull both seatback lock release
knobs at the same time and fold
the seatback down.
STEP
3
STEP
4
79
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■When folding the rear seatbacks down
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
●Do not fold the seatbacks down while driving.
●Stop the vehicle on level ground, set the parking brake and shift the shift
lever to P.
●Do not allow anyone to sit on a folded seatback or in the luggage compart-
ment while driving.
●Do not allow children to enter the luggage compartment.
●For vehicles with split rear seats, do not allow anyone sit on the rear center
seat if the rear right seat is folded down, as the seat belt buckle for the rear
center seat belt is then concealed under the folded seat and cannot be
used.
●Be careful not to catch your hand when folding the rear seatbacks.
●If it is necessary to detach the head restraints, remove it from the vehicle
or store it securely in the luggage compartment. This will prevent it from
injuring passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an
accident.
●Adjust the position of the front seat before folding down the rear seatbacks
so that the front seat does not interfere with the rear seatbacks when fold-
ing down the rear seatbacks.
80
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■After returning the rear seatback to the upright position
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
●Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback.
NOTICE
■Stowing the seat belts
The seat belts and the buckles must be stowed before you fold down the
rear seatbacks.
●Make sure that the seatback is securely
locked in position by lightly pushing it
back and forth.
If the seatback is not securely locked,
the red marking will be visible on the
seatback lock release knob. Make sure
that the red marking is not visible.
81
1
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
Head restraints
■Removing the head restraints
Front adjustable and rear center head restraints
Rear outside head restraints
Head restraints are provided for all seats.
Vehicles with adjustable type head restraints
Up
Pull the head restraint up.
Down
Push the head restraint down
while pushing the lock release
button.
Lock release
button
Pull the head restraint up while pushing
the lock release button.
Lock
release
button
Pull the seatback lock release knob and
fold down the seatback until it reaches
the position where the head restraints can
be removed.
STEP
1
82
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■Installing the head restraints
Front adjustable and rear center head restraints
Rear outside head restraints
Pull the head restraint up while pressing
the lock release button.
STEP
2
Lock release buttons
Align the head restraint with installation
holes and push it down to the lock posi-
tion.
Press and hold the lock release button
when lowering the head restraint.
Lock
release
button
Pull the lock release knob and fold down
the seatback until it reaches the position
where the head restraints can be
installed.
Align the head restraint with installation
holes and push it down to the lock posi-
tion.
Press and hold the lock release button
when lowering the head restraint.
STEP
1
STEP
2
Lock release button
83
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
■Adjusting the height of the head restraints (vehicles with adjustable
type head restraints)
■Adjusting the rear center seat head restraints
Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when
using.
CAUTION
■Head restraint precautions (vehicles with adjustable type head
restraints)
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to
do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
●Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
●After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure
they are locked in position.
●Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
84
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driv-
ing the vehicle.
■Correct use of the seat belts
●Extend the shoulder belt so
that it comes fully over the
shoulder, but does not
come into contact with the
neck or slide off the shoul-
der.
●Position the lap belt as low
as possible over the hips.
●Adjust the position of the
seatback. Sit up straight
and well back in the seat.
●Do not twist the seat belt.
■Fastening and releasing the seat belt
To fasten the seat belt, push
the plate into the buckle
until a click sound is heard.
To release the seat belt,
press the release button.
Release button
85
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
Rear center seat belt
■Fastening the seat belt
The rear center seat belt is a 3-point type restraint with 2 buckles.
Both seat belt buckles must be correctly located and securely latched
for proper operation.
Push the tabs back all the way
into the cover and then remove
the tabs.
Push tab “B” into the buckle
until a click sound is heard.
Push tab “A” into the buckle
until a click sound is heard.
B
A
STEP
1
STEP
2
BA
86
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■Releasing the seat belt
Release the rear center seat belt only when necessary, such as
when folding down the rear seat. For safety, always store the plate
in the designated place after releasing it.
To release tab “A”, press the
release button.
To release tab “B”, insert the
key (P. 44) or tab “A” into the
hole on the buckle.
Retract the belt slowly when
releasing and stowing the seat
belt.
STEP
1
A
AB
B
87
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
Holding tab “A” and “B” together,
insert both tabs all the way into
the cover on the roof.
With tab “B” inserted all the way
into the cover, move tab “A”
slightly back toward the cover’s
inlet, so that it blocks the inlet.
B
A
STEP
2
STEP
3
B
A
88
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)
The pretensioner helps the seat
belt to quickly restrain the occu-
pant by retracting the seat belt
when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe frontal or
side collision.
The pretensioner does not acti-
vate in the event of a minor frontal
impact, a minor side impact, a
rear impact or a vehicle rollover.
■Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also
lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to
extend so that you can move around fully.
■Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and then
retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be
extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly.
To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once
more. (P. 140)
■Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult
size.
●Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 136)
●When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s
seat belt, follow the instructions on P. 84 regarding seat belt usage.
89
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
■Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate
for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent colli-
sions.
■Seat belt extender
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
■Wearing a seat belt
●Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
●Always wear a seat belt properly.
●Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt
for more than one person at once, including children.
●Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always
use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
●To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than
necessary. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting
up straight and well back in the seats.
●Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
●Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
If your seat belts cannot be fastened
securely because they are not long
enough, a personalized seat belt
extender is available from your Toyota
dealer free of charge.
90
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■Pregnant women
■People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (P. 84)
■When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes
twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries
that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
■Seat belt pretensioners
●Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat.
Doing so will disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor
from detecting the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the seat belt
pretensioner for the front passenger’s seat may not activate in the event of
a collision.
●If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In
that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at
your Toyota dealer.
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat
belt in the proper way. (P. 84)
Women who are pregnant should position
the lap belt as low as possible over the
hips in the same manner as other occu-
pants. Extend the shoulder belt com-
pletely over the shoulder and position the
belt across the chest. Avoid belt contact
over the rounding of the abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not
only the pregnant woman, but also the
fetus could suffer death or serious injury
as a result of sudden braking or a colli-
sion.
91
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Seat belt damage and wear
●Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be
jammed in the door.
●Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat
belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
●Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Toyota
dealer.
●Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been
involved in a serious accident, even if there’s no obvious damage.
●Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the
seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Toyota dealer.
Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating
properly, resulting in death or serious injury.
■When using or storing the rear center seat belt
●For vehicles with split rear seats, do not allow anyone sit on the rear center
seat if the rear right seat is folded down, as the seat belt buckle for the rear
center seat belt is then concealed under the folded seat and cannot be
used.
●When storing the rear center seat belt, ensure that the tabs are securely
inserted into the cover on the roof. If the tabs are not stowed properly, they
may drop from the cover while driving, resulting in serious injury.
●Do not use the rear center seat belt
with either buckle released.
Fastening only one of the buckles may
result in death or serious injury in case
of sudden braking or a collision.
92
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■Using a seat belt extender
●Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without
the extender.
●Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system
because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increas-
ing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
●The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when
used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the
one originally intended.
NOTICE
■When using a seat belt extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the
extender, not on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.
93
1
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
Steering wheel
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious injury.
■After adjusting the steering wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an
accident, and resulting in death or serious injury.
The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.
Hold the steering wheel and
push the lever down.
Adjust to the ideal position by
moving the steering wheel
horizontally and vertically.
After adjustment, pull the lever
up to secure the steering
wheel.
STEP
1
STEP
2
94
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Adjusting the height of rear view mirror
Adjust the height of the rear view
mirror by moving it up and down.
Anti-glare function
Reflected light from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced
by operating the lever.
Normal position
Anti-glare position
The rear view mirror’s position can be adjusted to enable sufficient
confirmation of the rear view in accordance with the driver's seating
posture.
95
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
96
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Outside rear view mirrors
Folding the mirrors
Push the mirror back in the direc-
tion of the vehicle’s rear.
Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch.
To select a mirror to adjust,
press the switch.
Left
Right
To adjust the mirror, press the
switch.
Up
Right
Down
Left
STEP
1
STEP
2
97
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
■Mirror angle can be adjusted when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The “POWER” switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.
■When the mirrors are fogged up (vehicles with outside rear view mirror
defoggers)
The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers.
Turn on the rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror
defoggers. (P. 247)
CAUTION
■When driving the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an
accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
●Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
●Do not drive with the mirrors folded.
●Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly
adjusted before driving.
■When a mirror is moving
To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your
hand caught by the moving mirror.
■When the mirror defoggers are operating (vehicles with an outside rear
view mirror defoggers)
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and
burn you.
98
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Power windows
Window lock switch
Press the switch down to lock
the passenger window switches.
Use this switch to prevent chil-
dren from accidentally opening or
closing a passenger window.
The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.
Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:
Closing
One-touch closing (driver’s
window only)*
Opening
One-touch opening (driver’s
window only)*
*: To stop the window partway,
operate the switch in the oppo-
site direction.
: If equipped
99
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
1
Before driving
■The power windows can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
■Operating the power windows after turning the hybrid system off
Vehicles without a smart key system
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even
after the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. They can-
not, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even
after the “POWER” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off.
They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■Jam protection function (driver’s window only)
If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame,
window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
■When the power window does not close normally (driver’s window
only)
If the jam protection function is operating abnormally and a window cannot
be closed, perform the following operations using the power window switch
on the driver’s door.
●Vehicles without a smart key system: After stopping the vehicle, the win-
dow can be closed by holding the power window switch in the one-touch
closing position while the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position.
●Vehicles with a smart key system: After stopping the vehicle, the window
can be closed by holding the power window switch in the one-touch clos-
ing position while the “POWER” switch is turned to ON mode.
●If the window still cannot be closed even by carrying out the operation
explained above, initialize the function by performing the following proce-
dure.
100
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position.
Continue holding the switch for a further 6 seconds after the win-
dow has closed.
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening position.
Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the win-
dow has opened completely.
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position
once again. Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds
after the window has closed.
If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the
beginning.
If the window continues to close but then re-open slightly even after perform-
ing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
CAUTION
■Closing the windows
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body
in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
●Do not allow children to operate the power windows.
Closing a power window on someone can cause death or serious injury.
The driver is responsible for instructing children not to operate the power
windows.
■Jam protection function (driver’s window only)
●Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection
function.
●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just
before the window fully closes.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
101
1
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Before driving
Moon roof
Use the overhead switches to open and close the moon roof and tilt
it up and down.
■Opening and closing
Opens
the moon roof
*
The moon roof stops slightly
before the fully open position
to reduce wind noise.
Press the switch again to fully
open the moon roof.
Closes
the moon roof
*
*: Lightly press either of the moon
roof switches to stop the moon
roof partway.
■Tilting up and down
Tilts the moon roof up*
Tilts the moon roof down*
*: Lightly press either of the moon
roof switches to stop the moon
roof partway.
: If equipped
102
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■The moon roof can be operated when
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
■Operating the moon roof after turning the hybrid system off
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the
“POWER” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. It cannot,
however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while the moon
roof is closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens
slightly.
■Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade
will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.
103
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
1
Before driving
■When the moon roof does not close normally
Perform the following procedure:
●If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly
Stop the vehicle.
Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.*1
The moon roof will close, re-open and pause for approximately 10
seconds.*2 Then it will close again, tilt up and pause for approxi-
mately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and
then release the switch.
●If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up
Stop the vehicle.
Press and hold the “TILT” switch*1 until the moon roof moves into
the tilt up position and stops.
Release the “TILT” switch once and then press and hold the “TILT”
switch again.*1
The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up
position.*2 Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1
second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and
then release the switch.
*1: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to
be performed again from the beginning.
*2: If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second pause,
automatic operation will be disabled. In that case, press and hold the
“CLOSE” or “TILT” switch, and the moon roof will tilt up and pause for
approximately 1 second. Then it will tilt down, open and close. Check to
make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the
switch.
If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above proce-
dure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
104
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■Moon roof open reminder function
An alarm will sound and a message is shown on the multi-information dis-
play when the driver’s door is opened with the moon roof not fully closed and
the “POWER” switch off.
CAUTION
■Opening the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehi-
cle while it is moving.
●Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
■Closing the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body
in a position where it could be caught when the moon roof is being oper-
ated.
●Do not allow children to operate the moon roof.
Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury. The
driver is responsible for instructing children not to operate the moon roof.
■Jam protection function
●Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection
function.
●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just
before the moon roof fully closes.
105
1
Before driving
1-6. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:
■Before refueling the vehicle
●Vehicles without a smart key system
Turn the engine switch off and ensure that all the doors and
windows are closed.
●Vehicles with a smart key system
Turn the “POWER” switch off and ensure that all the doors
and windows are closed.
●Confirm the type of fuel. (P. 107)
■Opening the fuel tank cap
Pull up the opener to open the
fuel filler door.
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly
to open.
STEP
1
STEP
2
106
1-6. Refueling
Closing the fuel tank cap
After refueling, turn the fuel tank
cap until you hear a click. Once
the cap is released, it will turn
slightly in the opposite direction.
Hang the fuel tank cap on the
back of the fuel filler door.
STEP
3
107
1-6. Refueling
1
Before driving
■Fuel types
Unleaded gasoline (Octane rating 87 [Research Octane Number 91] or
higher)
■Use of ethanol blended gasoline in a gasoline engine
●Make sure that the ethanol blended gasoline to be used has a suitable
Research Octane Number as outlined in “Fuel types”.
●Use only gasoline containing up to 15%
ethanol.
DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline
that could contain more than 15% etha-
nol, including from any pump labeled
E30, E50, E85 (which are only some
examples of fuel containing more than
15% ethanol).
DO NOT use gasoline
containing more than 15%
ethanol.
(30% ethanol)
(50% ethanol)
(85% ethanol)
108
1-6. Refueling
CAUTION
■When refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do
so may result in death or serious injury.
●After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an
unpainted metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to
discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from
static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.
●Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened.
Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot
weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.
●Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their
body to come close to an open fuel tank.
●Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
●Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
●Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically
charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition
hazard.
■When refueling
Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel
tank:
●Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck
●Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off
●Do not top off the fuel tank
■When replacing the fuel cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your
vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in
death or serious injury.
109
1-6. Refueling
1
Before driving
NOTICE
■Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control
system to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the
vehicle's painted surface.
110
1-7. Theft deterrent system
Immobilizer system
: If equipped
The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the
hybrid system from starting if a key has not been previously regis-
tered in the vehicle’s on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft but does not
guarantee absolute security against all vehicle thefts.
Vehicles without a smart
key system
The indicator light flashes after
the key has been removed
from the engine switch to indi-
cate that the system is operat-
ing.
The indicator light stops flash-
ing after the registered key
has been inserted into the
engine switch to indicate that
the system has been can-
celed.
111
1-7. Theft deterrent system
1
Before driving
■System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type immobilizer system.
■Conditions affecting operation
Depending on the surrounding environment and conditions, the immobilizer
system may not operate properly. This may prevent the hybrid system from
starting. (P. 55)
Vehicles with a smart key
system
The indicator light flashes after
the “POWER” switch has been
turned off to indicate that the
system is operating.
The indicator light stops flash-
ing after the “POWER” switch
has been turned to ACCES-
SORY or ON mode to indicate
that the system has been can-
celed.
112
1-7. Theft deterrent system
■Certifications for the immobilizer system
U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-3
FCC ID: MOZRI-33BTY
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS stan-
dard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device.
CAUTION
■Certifications for the immobilizer system
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTICE
■To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper
operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
113
1
1-7. Theft deterrent system
Before driving
Theft prevention labels
These labels are attached to
the vehicle to reduce vehicle
theft by facilitating the tracing
and recovery of parts from sto-
len vehicles. Do not remove
under penalty of law.
114
1-8. Safety information
Correct driving posture
Drive with a good posture as follows:
Sit upright and well back in
the seat. (P. 76)
Adjust the position of the
seat forward or backward to
ensure the pedals can be
reached and easily
depressed to the extent
required. (P. 76)
Adjust the seatback so that
the controls are easily oper-
able. (P. 76)
Adjust the tilt and telescopic
positions of the steering
wheel downward so the air-
bag is facing your chest.
(P. 93)
Vehicles with adjustable
type head restraints: Lock
the head restraint in place
with the center of the head
restraint closest to the top
of your ears. (P. 81)
Wear the seat belt correctly.
(P. 84)
115
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■While driving
●Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
●Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce
the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of
death or serious injury to the driver or passenger.
●Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat
tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious injury. The adjustment mechanism may
also be damaged.
■Adjusting the seat position
●Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passen-
gers are not injured by the moving seat.
●Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid
injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
116
1-8. Safety information
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain
types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the
occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the
risk of death or serious injury.
SRS front airbags
SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front pas-
senger from impact with interior components.
SRS driver knee airbag
Can help provide driver protection.
117
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
SRS side and curtain shield airbags
SRS side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants.
SRS curtain shield airbags
Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer
seats.
Other SRS airbags
SRS seat cushion airbags
Can help restrain the driver and front passenger.
118
1-8. Safety information
SRS airbag system components
Curtain shield airbags
SRS warning light and “AIR
BAG ON” and “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator lights
Side airbags
Side impact sensors (rear)
Front passenger’s seat
cushion airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt
buckle switch
Driver airbag
Driver’s seat belt buckle
switch
Driver’s seat cushion airbag
Side impact sensors (front)
Seat belt pretensioners and
force limiters
Side impact sensors (front
door)
Driver’s knee airbag
Front passenger occupant
classification system (ECU
and sensors)
Airbag sensor assembly
Front impact sensors
Front passenger airbag
119
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based
on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag
sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on infor-
mation obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system compo-
nents diagram above. This information includes crash severity and
occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in
the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain
the motion of the occupants.
120
1-8. Safety information
■If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
●Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying
(inflating) SRS airbag.
●A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
●Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator)
as well as the front seats, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side
rails, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
●The windshield may crack.
■SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags/SRS seat cush-
ion airbags)
●The SRS front airbags and SRS seat cushion airbags will deploy in the
event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force
corresponding to an approximately 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal col-
lision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher in the following
situations:
• If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sigh pole,
which can move or deform on impact
• If the vehicle is involved in an underride collision, such as a collision in
which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a
truck
●Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt
pretensioners will activate.
●The SRS front airbags and seat cushion airbag for the front passenger
will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger
seat. However, the SRS front airbags and seat cushion airbag for the
front passenger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat
is unoccupied.
●The SRS seat cushion airbags on the front seats will not operate if the
occupant is not wearing a seat belt.
121
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
■SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side and curtain shield air-
bags)
●The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an
impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corre-
sponding to the impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb.
[1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpen-
dicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph
[20 - 30 km/h]).
●The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy in the event of a severe
frontal collision.
■Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other
than a collision
The SRS front airbags and SRS seat cushion airbags may also deploy if a
serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are
shown in the illustration.
●Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or
hard surface
●Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
●Landing hard or falling
122
1-8. Safety information
■Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front air-
bags/SRS seat cushion airbags)
The SRS front airbags and SRS seat cushion airbags do not generally
inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it
is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any
type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the
SRS front airbags and SRS seat cushion airbags may occur.
●Collision from the side
●Collision from the rear
●Vehicle rollover
123
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
■Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags
(SRS side and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle is
subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the
side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags do not generally inflate if the vehi-
cle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in
a low-speed side collision.
■When to contact your Toyota dealer
In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Con-
tact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
●Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
●Collision from the side to the vehicle
body other than the passenger com-
partment
●Collision from the side at an angle
●Collision from the front*
●Collision from the rear
●Vehicle rollover
*: Depending on the conditions and type
of accident, the curtain shield airbags
may deploy (inflate) upon frontal
impact.
●The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an acci-
dent that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS front airbags and SRS
seat cushion airbags to inflate.
124
1-8. Safety information
●A portion of a door is damaged or
deformed, or the vehicle was involved
in an accident that was not severe
enough to cause the SRS side and cur-
tain shield airbags to inflate.
●The pad section of the steering wheel,
dashboard near the front passenger air-
bag or lower portion of the instrument
panel is scratched, cracked, or other-
wise damaged.
●The front seat cushion surface is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-
aged.
●The surface of the seats with the side
airbag is scratched, cracked or other-
wise damaged.
●The portion of the front pillars, rear pil-
lars or roof side rail garnishes (padding)
containing the curtain shield airbags
inside is scratched, cracked, or other-
wise damaged.
125
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
●The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause
death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises:
Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm)
of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag pro-
vides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the
center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in.
(250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several
ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle designs vary,
many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the
driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat
somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the
road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the
seat if your vehicle has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the air-
bag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while
still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of
the instrument panel controls.
126
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and
can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very
close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the air-
bag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits
upright.
●Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or
seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small
to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint sys-
tem. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in
the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are
safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. (P. 136)
●If the seat belt extender has been con-
nected to the front seat belt buckles but
the seat belt extender has not also
been fastened to the latch plate of the
seat belt, the SRS front airbags will
judge that the driver and front passen-
ger are wearing the seat belt even
though the seat belt has not been con-
nected. In this case, the SRS front air-
bags may not activate correctly in a
collision, resulting in death or serious
injury in the event of a collision. Be sure
to wear the seat belt with the seat belt
extender.
●Do not sit on the edge of the seat or
lean against the dashboard.
127
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●Do not allow a child to stand in front of
the SRS front passenger airbag unit or
sit on the knees of a front passenger.
●Do not allow the front seat occupants to
hold items on their knees.
●Do not lean against the door, the roof
side rail or the front, side and rear pil-
lars.
●Do not allow anyone to kneel on the
passenger seat toward the door or put
their head or hands outside the vehicle.
●Do not attach anything to or lean any-
thing against areas such as the dash-
board, steering wheel pad and lower
portion of the instrument panel.
These items can become projectiles
when the SRS driver, front passenger
and driver knee airbags deploy.
128
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of
these items could become projectiles and may cause death or serious
injury, should the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy.
●If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS driver knee airbag will
deploy, be sure to remove it.
●Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side
airbags and SRS seat cushion airbags inflate as they may interfere with
inflation of the SRS airbags. Such accessories may prevent the side air-
bags and seat cushion airbags from activating correctly, disable the sys-
tem or cause the side airbags and seat cushion airbags to inflate
accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.
●Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS air-
bag components.
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
●Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS air-
bags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
●Do not attach anything to areas such as
a door, windshield glass, side door
glass, front or rear pillar, roof side rail
and assist grip.
●Vehicles without a smart key system:
Do not attach any heavy, sharp or hard
objects such as keys and accessories
to the key. The objects may restrict the
SRS driver knee airbag inflation or be
thrust into the driver’s seat area by the
force of the deploying airbag, thus
causing a danger.
129
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a
door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do
so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
●If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel
pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have
them replaced by your Toyota dealer.
●Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat.
Doing so will disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor
from detecting the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the SRS front
airbags for the front passenger may not deploy in the event of a collision.
■Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications
without consulting your Toyota dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or
deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.
●Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags.
●Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel,
instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear
pillars or roof side rails.
●Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the
occupant compartment.
●Installation of a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows or
winches.
●Modifications to the vehicle’s suspension system.
●Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD
players.
●Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability.
130
1-8. Safety information
Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classifica-
tion system. This system detects the conditions of the front passen-
ger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the front
passenger.
SRS warning light
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
“AIR BAG ON” indicator light
Seat belt reminder light
131
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
■Adult*1
■Child*4
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG
ON”
SRS warning light Off
Seat belt reminder light
Off*2
or
flashing*3
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Activated
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger
side
Seat cushion airbag in the front passenger
side
Activated*2
or
deactivated*3
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Activated
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG
OFF” or
“AIR BAG
ON”*4
SRS warning light Off
Seat belt reminder light Off*2 or
flashing*3
Devices
Front passenger airbag Deactivated
or activated*4
Side airbag on the front
passenger seat Activated
Curtain shield airbag in the front
passenger side
Seat cushion airbag in the front passenger
side
Deactivated
or
activated*4, *2
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Activated
132
1-8. Safety information
■Child restraint system with infant*5
■Unoccupied
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG
OFF”*6
SRS warning light Off
Seat belt reminder light
Off*2
or
flashing*3
Devices
Front passenger airbag Deactivated
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Activated
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger
side
Seat cushion airbag in the front passenger
side Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Activated
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG
OFF”
SRS warning light Off
Seat belt reminder light
Devices
Front passenger airbag Deactivated
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Activated
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger
side
Seat cushion airbag in the front passenger
side Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Activated
133
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
■There is a malfunction in the system
*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a
smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may not
recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique and
posture.
*2: In the event the front passenger is wearing a seat belt.
*3: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
*4: For some children, child in seat, child in booster seat or child in
convertible seat, the system may not recognize him/her as a child.
Factors which may affect this can be the physique or posture.
*5: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front pas-
senger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only
be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable.
(P. 136)
*6: In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on
how to install the child restraint system properly. (P. 140)
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG
OFF”
SRS warning light On
Seat belt reminder light
Devices
Front passenger airbag Deactivated
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Activated
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger
side
Seat cushion airbag in the front passenger
side Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Activated
134
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
■Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant
classification system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●Wear the seat belt properly.
●Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt plate has not been left inserted
into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
●Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using
the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat
belt buckle, and reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender
after making sure the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you
use the seat belt extender while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illumi-
nated, the SRS airbags for the passenger may not activate correctly,
which could cause death or serious injury in the event of a collision.
●Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment. (e.g.
seatback pocket)
●Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or
feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
●Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or
press on the seatback with their legs.
●Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
135
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
●Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear
seat. This may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated,
which indicates that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of
a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seat-
back to a position where it does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front
passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving.
Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the
seat belt system.
●If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator
light is illuminated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the
passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and
with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still
remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or
if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.
●When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on
the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front pas-
senger seat in the proper order. (P. 140)
●Do not modify or remove the front seats.
●Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Other-
wise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the
detection system. In this case, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.
●Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the
front seatbacks.
●Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion and seat cover, that cov-
ers the seat cushion surface.
●Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.
136
1-8. Safety information
Child restraint systems
Points to remember
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is
much safer than installing one on the front passenger seat.
●Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is
appropriate to the age and size of the child.
●For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the
child restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual.
(P. 140)
Types of child restraints
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types
according to the age and size of the child:
Rear facing — Infant seat/convertible seat
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be prop-
erly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder
belt.
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the
use of child restraint systems.
137
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
Forward facing — Convertible seat
Booster seat
■Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
●Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
●If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear
seat and use the vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 84)
138
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
■Child restraint precautions
●For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child
must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system
depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is
not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be
crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior.
●Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that con-
forms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to acci-
dent statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat
than in the front seat.
●Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger
seat even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. In the event
of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag
and seat cushion airbag in the front passenger side can cause death or
serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is
installed on the front passenger seat.
●A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front pas-
senger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that
requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat
since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat.
Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and always move the seat as
far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illumi-
nated, because the front passenger airbag and seat cushion airbag in the
front passenger side could inflate with considerable speed and force. Oth-
erwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.
●Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system
on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system
with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not
securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or seri-
ous injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop,
sudden swerve or an accident.
139
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Child restraint precautions
●Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body
against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side
rails from which the SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy
even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if
the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact
could cause death or serious injury to the child.
●Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by
the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If
it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child
in the event of a sudden stop or an accident.
■When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes
twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries
that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
■When the child restraint system is not in use
●Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is
not in use. Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the pas-
senger compartment.
●If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the
vehicle or store it securely in the luggage compartment. This will prevent it
from injuring passengers in the event of sudden stop, sudden swerve or an
accident.
140
1-8. Safety information
Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions. Firmly
secure child restraints to the rear seats using the LATCH anchors or
a seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child
restraint.
The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is
not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil-
dren) system.
Child restraint LATCH anchors
LATCH anchors are provided
for the outside rear seats. (But-
tons displaying the location of
the anchors are attached to the
seats.)
Seat belts equipped with a
child restraint locking mecha-
nism (ALR/ELR belts except
driver’s seat belt) (P. 84)
Anchor brackets (for top tether
strap)
An anchor bracket is provided
for each rear seat.
141
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
Installation with LATCH system
Type A
Widen the gap in the seat cushion slightly.
Latch the hooks of the lower
straps onto the LATCH anchors.
If the child restraint has a top
tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top
tether strap anchor.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint
system indicates the presence of
a lower connector system.
STEP
1
Canada
only
STEP
2
142
1-8. Safety information
Type B
Widen the gap in the seat cushion slightly.
Latch the buckles onto the
LATCH anchors. If the child
restraint has a top tether strap,
the top tether strap should be
latched onto the top tether strap
anchor.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint
system indicates the presence of
a lower connector system.
Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)
■Rear facing Infant seat/convertible seat
Place the child restraint system
on the rear seat facing the rear
of the vehicle.
STEP
1
Canada
only
STEP
2
STEP
1
143
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and insert
the plate into the buckle. Make
sure that the belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt
and allow it to retract to put it in
lock mode. In lock mode, the belt
cannot be extended.
While pushing the child restraint
system down into the rear seat,
allow the shoulder belt to retract
until the child restraint system is
securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
144
1-8. Safety information
■Forward facing Convertible seat
Rear center seat: Adjust the head restraint to the upmost
position. (P. 81)
Place the child restraint system
on the seat facing the front of the
vehicle.
Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and insert
the plate into the buckle. Make
sure that the belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt
and allow it to retract to put it in
lock mode. In lock mode, the belt
cannot be extended.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
145
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
While pushing the child restraint
system into the rear seat, allow
the shoulder belt to retract until
the child restraint system is
securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (P. 146)
■Booster seat
Place the child restraint system
on the seat facing the front of the
vehicle.
Sit the child in the child restraint
system. Fit the seat belt to the
child restraint system according
to the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions and insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the belt is
not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is
correctly positioned over the
child’s shoulder and that the lap
belt is as low as possible.
(P. 84)
STEP
5
STEP
6
STEP
1
STEP
2
146
1-8. Safety information
Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
Push the buckle release button
and fully retract the seat belt.
Child restraint systems with a top tether strap
Remove the luggage cover (if equipped). (P. 343)
Remove the head restraint (P. 81)
Secure the child restraint system using the LATCH anchors or
a seat belt.
Open the anchor bracket cover,
latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top tether
strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.
Reinstall the luggage cover (if equipped) and the head
restraint.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
■Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages
The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifica-
tions can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to SAE J1819.
STEP
5
147
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■When installing a booster seat
To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the
shoulder belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause
injury or discomfort to the child. (P. 88)
■When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual
and fix the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other
passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
●When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s
shoulder. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event
of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
●Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not
twisted.
●If the driver’s seat interferes with the
child restraint system and prevents it
from being attached correctly, attach
the child restraint system to the right-
hand rear seat.
●Adjust the front passenger seat so that
it does not interfere with the child
restraint system.
●Only put a forward-facing child restraint
system on the front seat when unavoid-
able. When installing a forward-facing
child restraint system on the front pas-
senger seat, move the seat as far back
as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated. Failure to
do so may result in death or serious
injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).
148
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
■When installing a child restraint system
●Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward
to ensure that it has been securely installed.
●After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
●Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
●When a child restraint system with a top tether strap is installed, do not
install the head restraint. The head restraint may interfere with the top
tether strap preventing secure installation of the child restraint system.
●Make sure to properly store the removed head restraint in a secure place
when you use the child restraint system on the rear seat.
■Do not use a seat belt extender
If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the
seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause
death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sud-
den braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
■To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors
When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects
around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child
restraint. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may
cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
●When using the right side seat for the
child restraint system, do not sit in the
center seat. Seat belt function may be
impaired, such as being positioned
overly high or loose-fitting, which may
result in death or serious injury in the
event of sudden braking or an accident.
When driving 2
149
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle............ 150
Engine (ignition)
switch............................. 160
Power (ignition) switch..... 164
EV drive mode ................. 172
Hybrid transmission ......... 175
Turn signal lever .............. 178
Parking brake................... 179
Horn ................................. 180
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters ......... 181
Indicators and
warning lights................. 184
Multi-information
display............................ 187
2-3. Operating the lights
and wipers
Headlight switch............... 204
Fog light switch ................ 208
Windshield wipers
and washer .................... 210
Rear window wiper
and washer .................... 214
2-4. Using other driving
systems
Cruise control................... 217
Driving assist systems ..... 221
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage .......... 226
Vehicle load limits ............ 230
Winter driving tips ............ 231
Trailer towing ................... 235
Dinghy towing .................. 236
150
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driv-
ing:
■Starting the hybrid system
P. 160, 164
■Driving
With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D.
(P. 175)
Release the parking brake. (P. 179)
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
■Stopping
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
If necessary, set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift
the shift lever to P. (P. 175)
■Parking the vehicle
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
Shift the shift lever to P. (P. 175)
Set the parking brake. (P. 179)
Vehicles without a smart key system
Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position to stop the
hybrid system.
Vehicles with a smart key system
Press the “POWER” switch to stop the hybrid system.
Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your
person.
If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
151
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Starting off on a steep uphill
Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever
to D.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
Release the parking brake.
■When starting off on a uphill
The hill-start assist control will activate. (P. 221)
■Driving in the rain
●Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the
windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
●Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be
especially slippery.
●Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain,
because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road
surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.
■Engine speed while driving
In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving.
This is due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation
to meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration.
●The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill
●When the accelerator pedal is released
■Breaking in your new Toyota
To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is rec-
ommended:
●For the first 200 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
●For the first 1000 miles (1600 km):
• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
• Avoid sudden acceleration.
• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
152
2-1. Driving procedures
■Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability
of the correct fuel. (P. 498)
■For efficient use
●Shift the shift lever to D when driving.
In the N position, the gasoline engine operates but electricity cannot be
generated. The hybrid battery (traction battery) will discharge, requiring
unnecessary engine power to recharge.
●Drive your vehicle smoothly.
Avoid abrupt acceleration and deceleration. Gradual acceleration and
deceleration will make more effective use of the electric motor (traction
motor) without having to use gasoline engine power.
●Avoid repeated acceleration.
Repeated acceleration consumes hybrid battery (traction battery) power,
resulting in poor acceleration. Battery power can be restored by driving
with the accelerator pedal slightly released.
●Shift the shift lever to P when parking.
In the N position, the hybrid battery (traction battery) does not recharge.
Leaving the shift lever in the N position for an extended period of time
may discharge the hybrid battery. The vehicle cannot run if the hybrid
battery is discharged.
153
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
CAUTION
■When starting the vehicle
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the hybrid sys-
tem operating. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
■When driving the vehicle
●Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accel-
erator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake
pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident
that could result in death or serious injury.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a diffi-
culty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the
vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and acceler-
ator pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake
pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, result-
ing in an accident.
●The driver should pay extra attention to pedestrians when the vehicle is
powered only by the electric motor (traction motor). Because there is no
engine noise, the pedestrians may misjudge the vehicle’s movement.
●Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot
parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.
●Do not let the vehicle roll backward while the shift lever is in a driving posi-
tion, or roll forward while the shift lever is in R.
Doing so may result in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
●If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and
check that the back door is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehi-
cle can cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a
serious health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
●Do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
154
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
●Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
●Do not shift the shift lever to D while the vehicle is moving backward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
●Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the
hybrid system. Engine braking is not available with the hybrid system dis-
engaged.
●During normal driving, do not turn off the hybrid system. Turning the hybrid
system off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control,
however, power assist to the steering will be lost. This will make it more
difficult to steer smoothly, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so.
In the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the
vehicle in the normal way: P. 493
●Use engine braking (shift position B) to maintain a safe speed when driv-
ing down a steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose
effectiveness. (P. 176)
●Do not adjust the positions of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or
outside rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents,
resulting in death or serious injury.
●Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their body
are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.
●Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit per-
mits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-
speed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire
failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer
to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability
tires or not before driving at such speeds.
155
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
CAUTION
■When driving on slippery road surfaces
●Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and
reduce your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.
●Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shift changing, or changes in
engine speed could cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident.
●After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make
sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent
the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet
and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in
an accident.
■When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
Shifting the shift lever to a gear other than P or N may lead to unexpected
rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in
death or serious injury.
■If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indica-
tors)
Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as soon
as possible.
Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads
and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.
156
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■When the vehicle is stopped
●Do not depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily.
If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate
suddenly and unexpectedly, causing an accident.
●Do not leave the vehicle with the hybrid system on for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space
and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
●In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep
depressing the brake pedal while the “READY” indicator is on. Apply the
parking brake as necessary.
●If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused
by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal
and securely apply the parking brake as needed.
●Avoid revving or racing the engine.
Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause
the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible
material is nearby.
■When the vehicle is parked
●Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in
the vehicle when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following:
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a
fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and
plastic material of glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the
interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehi-
cle's electrical components.
●Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a
place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when
luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.
157
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
CAUTION
●Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place
containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard.
Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehi-
cle.
●Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a
metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause
the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.
●Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the hybrid
system and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the hybrid system is operating.
Sound or shuddering may not be noticed even when the hybrid vehicle is
ready to drive (when the “READY” indicator is illuminated).
●Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the hybrid system is operating or
immediately after turning the hybrid system off.
Doing so may cause burns.
●Do not leave the hybrid system operating in an area with snow build-up, or
where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the
hybrid system is operating, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehi-
cle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
■Exhaust gases
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless
and odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health
hazard.
●If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the hybrid system. In a
closed area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the
vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
●The exhaust system should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or
crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise,
be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Toyota dealer.
Failure to do so may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in
death or a serious health hazard.
158
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the hybrid system off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the
shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or
fire due to hybrid system overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in
a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle,
leading to death or a serious health hazard.
■When braking
●When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause
one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the
parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.
●If the electronically controlled brake system does not operate, do not fol-
low other vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require brak-
ing.
In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be
depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase.
Have your brakes fixed immediately.
●The brake system consists of 2 or more individual hydraulic systems; if
one of the systems fails, the other(s) will still operate. In this case, the
brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking
distance will increase. Have your brakes fixed immediately.
NOTICE
■When driving the vehicle
●Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during
driving, as this may restrain driving torque.
●Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake
pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.
■When parking the vehicle
Always shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is acci-
dentally depressed.
159
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
NOTICE
■Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
●Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for
an extended period of time.
Doing so may damage the power steering motor.
●When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid
damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
■If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
●It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
●The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.
●The vehicle will lean abnormally.
Information on what to do in case of a flat tire (P. 463)
■When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may
cause the following serious damage to the vehicle:
●Engine stalling
●Short in electrical components
●Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be
sure to have your Toyota dealer check the following:
●Brake function
●Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, hybrid
transmission, etc.
●Lubricant condition of the bearings and suspension joints (where possi-
ble), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
160
2-1. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles without a smart key system)
■Starting the hybrid system
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
Turn the engine switch to the
“START” position to start the
hybrid system.
Continue depressing the brake
pedal until the hybrid system is
completely started.
Check that the “READY” indicator is on.
If the “READY” indicator changes from a flashing light to a solid
light and a beep sound, the hybrid system is starting normally.
The vehicle will not move when the “READY” indicator is off.
The vehicle can move when the “READY” indicator is on even if
the engine is stopped. (The engine starts or stops automatically in
accordance with the state of the vehicle.)
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
161
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
■Turning the key from “ACC” to “LOCK”
Shift the shift lever to P.
■Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle
P. 28
■When the ambient temperature is low, such as during winter driving
conditions
It may take time until the “READY” indicator comes on.
■Changing the engine switch positions
“LOCK”
The steering wheel is locked
and the key can be removed.
(The key can be removed only
when the shift lever is in P.)
“ACC”
Some electrical components
such as the power outlet can
be used.
“ON”
All electrical components can
be used.
“START”
For starting the hybrid system.
STEP
1
Push in the key and turn it to the “LOCK”
position.
STEP
2
162
2-1. Driving procedures
■If the hybrid system does not start (vehicles with immobilizer system)
The immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 110)
Contact your Toyota dealer.
■When the steering lock cannot be released
■If the “READY” indicator does not come on
If the “READY” indicator does not come on when you turn the engine switch
with the shift lever in P and the brake pedal depressed, contact your Toyota
dealer immediately.
■If the hybrid system is malfunctioning
P. 448
■Key reminder function
A buzzer sounds if the driver’s door is opened while the engine switch is in
the “LOCK” or “ACC” position to remind you to remove the key.
CAUTION
■When starting the hybrid system
Always start the hybrid system while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not
depress the accelerator pedal while starting the hybrid system under any cir-
cumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■Caution when driving
Do not turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position while driving. If, in an
emergency, you must turn the hybrid system off while the vehicle is moving,
turn the engine switch only to the “ACC” position to stop the hybrid system.
An accident may result if the hybrid system is stopped while driving.
(P. 493)
When starting the hybrid system, the
engine switch may seem stuck in the
“LOCK” position. To free it, turn the key
while turning the steering wheel slightly
left and right.
163
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
NOTICE
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the engine switch in the “ACC” or “ON” position for long periods
of time without the hybrid system on.
■When starting the hybrid system
If the hybrid system becomes difficult to start, have your vehicle checked by
your Toyota dealer immediately.
164
2-1. Driving procedures
Power (ignition) switch (vehicles with a smart key system)
Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic
key on your person starts the hybrid system or changes “POWER”
switch modes.
■Starting the hybrid system
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
If the shift lever is not set in P, the hybrid system may not be
started. (P. 175)
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
will be displayed on the multi-information display.
If it is not displayed, the hybrid system cannot be started.
Press the “POWER” switch.
Continue depressing the brake
pedal until the hybrid system is
completely started.
The hybrid system can be
started from any “POWER”
switch mode.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
165
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Check that the “READY” indicator is on.
If the “READY” indicator changes from a flashing light to a solid
light and a beep sound, the hybrid system is starting normally.
The vehicle will not move when the “READY” indicator is off.
The vehicle can move when the “READY” indicator is on even if
the engine is stopped. (The engine starts or stops automatically in
accordance with the state of the vehicle.)
■Stopping the hybrid system
Stop the vehicle completely.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Set the parking brake. (P. 179)
Press the “POWER” switch.
Slowly release the brake pedal and check that on the
multi-information display is off.
STEP
5
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
166
2-1. Driving procedures
■Changing “POWER” switch modes
Modes can be changed by pressing the “POWER” switch with
brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time the switch is
pressed.)
Off*
The emergency flashers can
be used.
The multi-information display is
off.
ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components
such as the power outlet can
be used.
will be displayed on
the multi-information display.
ON mode
All electrical components can
be used.
will be displayed on
the multi-information display.
*: If the shift lever is in a position
other than P when turning off
the hybrid system, the
“POWER” switch will be turned
to ACCESSORY mode, not to
off.
167
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
When stopping the hybrid system with the shift lever in a
position other than P
If the hybrid system is stopped with the shift lever in a position other
than P, the “POWER” switch will not be turned off but instead be
turned to ACCESSORY mode. Perform the following procedure to
turn the switch off:
Check that the parking brake is set.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Check that is displayed on the multi-information dis-
play and then press the “POWER” switch once.
Check that on the multi-information display is off.
■Auto power off function
When the shift lever is in P, if the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY or ON mode
with the hybrid system not operating for more than 20 minutes (ACCES-
SORY mode) or one hour (ON mode), the “POWER” switch will automati-
cally turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent 12-volt battery
discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the “POWER” switch in ACCES-
SORY or ON mode for long periods of time when the hybrid system is not
operating.
■Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle
P. 28
■Electronic key battery depletion
P. 58
■When the ambient temperature is low, such as during winter driving
conditions
It may take time until the “READY” indicator comes on.
■Conditions affecting operation
P. 55
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
168
2-1. Driving procedures
■Notes for the entry function
P. 56
■If the hybrid system does not start
●The immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 110)
Contact your Toyota dealer.
■Steering lock
After turning the “POWER” switch off and opening and closing the doors, the
steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the
“POWER” switch again automatically cancels the steering lock.
■When the steering lock cannot be released
■Steering lock motor overheating prevention
To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, the motor may be sus-
pended if the hybrid system is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period
of time. In this case, refrain from operating the hybrid system. After about 10
seconds, the steering lock motor will resume functioning.
●Check that the shift lever is securely set
in P. The hybrid system may not start if
the shift lever is not securely in the P
position. “SHIFT TO P POSITION TO
START” will be displayed on the multi-
information display.
“STEERING LOCK ACTIVE” will be dis-
played on the multi-information display.
Check that the shift lever is set in P. Press
the “POWER” switch while turning the
steering wheel left and right.
169
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
■If the “READY” indicator does not come on
If the “READY” indicator does not come on when you press the “POWER”
switch with the shift lever in P and the brake pedal depressed, contact your
Toyota dealer immediately.
■If the hybrid system is malfunctioning
P. 448
■If the electronic key battery is depleted
P. 401
■Operation of the “POWER” switch
●When operating the “POWER” switch, one short, firm press is enough. If
the switch is pressed improperly, the hybrid system may not start or the
“POWER” switch mode may not change. It is not necessary to press and
hold the switch.
●If attempting to restart the hybrid system immediately after turning the
“POWER” switch off, the hybrid system may not start in some cases.
After turning the “POWER” switch off, please wait a few seconds before
restarting the hybrid system.
170
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■When starting the hybrid system
Always start the hybrid system while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not
depress the accelerator pedal while starting the hybrid system under any cir-
cumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■Caution while driving
If a hybrid system failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or
open the doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Doing so
may cause activation of the steering lock which may lead to an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
■When “CHECK SMART KEY SYSTEM” is displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer immediately. Failure to do so may lead to the system operat-
ing abnormally and possibly cause an accident or damage to the vehicle.
■Stopping the hybrid system in an emergency
If you want to stop the hybrid system in an emergency while driving the vehi-
cle, press and hold the “POWER” switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it
briefly 3 times or more in succession. (P. 493)
However, do not touch the “POWER” switch while driving except in an emer-
gency. Turning the hybrid system off while driving will not cause loss of
steering or braking control, however, power assist to the steering will be lost.
This will make it more difficult to steer smoothly, so you should pull over and
stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
171
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
NOTICE
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
●Do not leave the “POWER” switch in ACCESSORY or ON mode for long
periods of time without the hybrid system on.
●If is displayed on the multi-information display, the “POWER”
switch is not off. Exit the vehicle after turning the “POWER” switch off.
●Do not stop the hybrid system when the shift lever is in a position other
than P. If the hybrid system is stopped in another shift lever position, the
“POWER” switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCES-
SORY mode. If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode, 12-volt battery
discharge may occur.
■When starting the hybrid system
If the hybrid system becomes difficult to start, have your vehicle checked by
your Toyota dealer immediately.
■Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the “POWER” switch
If the “POWER” switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than
usual, such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Con-
tact your Toyota dealer immediately.
172
2-1. Driving procedures
EV drive mode
In EV drive mode, the electric motor (traction motor), powered by the
hybrid battery (traction battery), is used to drive the vehicle.
This mode allows you to drive in residential areas early in the morn-
ing and late at night, or in indoor parking lots etc. without concern
for noises and exhaust gas emissions.
Turns EV drive mode on/off
When EV drive mode is turned
on, the EV drive mode indica-
tor will come on.
Pressing the switch when in
EV drive mode will return the
vehicle to normal driving (using
the gasoline engine and elec-
tric motor [traction motor]).
173
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
■Switching to EV drive mode when the gasoline engine is cold
If the hybrid system is started while the gasoline engine is cold, the gasoline
engine will start automatically after a short period of time in order to warm
up. In this case, you will become unable to switch to EV drive mode.
After the hybrid system has started and the “READY” indicator has illumi-
nated, press the EV drive mode switch before the gasoline engine starts to
switch to EV drive mode.
■Situations in which EV drive mode cannot be turned on
It may not be possible to turn EV drive mode on in the following situations. If
it cannot be turned on, a buzzer will sound and a message will be shown on
the multi-information display.
●The temperature of the hybrid system is high.
The vehicle has been left in the sun, driven on a hill, driven at high
speeds, etc.
●The temperature of the hybrid system is low.
The vehicle has been left in temperatures lower than about 68F (20C)
for a long period of time etc.
●The gasoline engine is warming up.
●The hybrid battery (traction battery) is low.
When the amount of remaining hybrid battery (traction battery) charge
displayed on the meter or Display Audio system is low. (P. 35)
●Vehicle speed is high.
●The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly or the vehicle is on a hill etc.
●The windshield defogger is in use.
174
2-1. Driving procedures
■Automatic cancelation of EV drive mode
When driving in EV drive mode, the gasoline engine may automatically
restart in the following situations. When EV drive mode is canceled, a buzzer
will sound and the EV drive mode indicator will flash and go off.
●The hybrid battery (traction battery) becomes low.
●Vehicle speed becomes high.
●The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly or the vehicle is on a hill etc.
■Possible driving distance when driving in EV drive mode
In EV drive mode, it is possible to drive up to about 1.3 miles (2 km) if driving
at a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or less. (The distance that is possible
depends on the hybrid battery [traction battery] level and driving conditions.)
■Fuel economy
PRIUS c is designed to achieve the best possible fuel economy during nor-
mal driving (using the gasoline engine and electric motor [traction motor]).
Driving in EV drive mode more than necessary may lower fuel economy.
■Vehicle Proximity Notification System sound
Even when EV drive mode is turned on, the Vehicle Proximity Notification
System may produce a sound. (P. 25)
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
When driving in EV drive mode no engine noise is made. As such, pedestri-
ans, people riding bicycles or other people and vehicles in the surrounding
area may not be aware of the vehicle starting off or approaching them even if
the Vehicle Proximity Notification System is active. Therefore, take extra
care while driving.
175
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Hybrid transmission
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.
■Shifting the shift lever
Vehicles without a smart key system
While the engine switch is in the “ON” position, move the
shift lever with the brake pedal depressed.
Vehicles with a smart key system
While the “POWER” switch is in ON mode, move the shift
lever with the brake pedal depressed.
When shifting from P to another position; from D to R or P; or from
R to P, D or B; ensure that the brake pedal is being depressed
and the vehicle is stationary.
176
2-1. Driving procedures
■Shift position purpose
*: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noises, set the shift lever in the D
position for normal driving.
■Selecting Eco drive mode
Suitable for enhancing the fuel economy, because the torque
corresponding to the accelerator pedal depression amount can
be generated more smoothly than it is in normal conditions and
the operation of the air conditioning system (heating/cooling) will
be minimized.
Eco drive mode
When Eco drive mode is
turned on, the “ECO MODE”
indicator will come on.
Pressing the “ECO MODE”
switch again turns Eco drive
mode off.
Shift position Function
PParking the vehicle/starting the hybrid system
RReversing
NNeutral
DNormal driving*
BPosition for engine braking
177
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
■Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode
Eco drive mode controls the heating/cooling operations and fan speed of the
air conditioning system to enhance fuel efficiency. (P. 244) To improve air
conditioning performance, adjust the temperature setting or fan speed, or
turn off Eco drive mode.
■When in heavy traffic
If the shift lever is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will not be
charged. To help prevent the battery from discharging, avoid putting the shift
lever in N for an extended period of time.
■If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
P. 477
CAUTION
■When driving on slippery road surfaces
Do not accelerate or shift gears suddenly.
Sudden changes in engine braking may cause the vehicle to spin or skid,
resulting in an accident.
178
2-1. Driving procedures
Turn signal lever
■Turn signals can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
■If the indicator flashes faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned
out.
The turn signal lever can be used to show the following intentions
of the driver:
Right turn
Left turn
Lane change to the right
(push and hold the lever
partway)
The right hand signals will
flash until you release the
lever.
Lane change to the left
(push and hold the lever
partway)
The left hand signals will flash
until you release the lever.
179
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Parking brake
■Parking brake engaged warning buzzer
A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven at a speed of approximately 3
mph (5 km/h) or more with the parking brake engaged. (P. 450)
■Usage in winter time
P. 231
NOTICE
■Before driving
Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components
overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake
wear.
To set the parking brake,
fully pull the parking brake
lever while depressing the
brake pedal.
To release the parking
brake, slightly raise the
lever and lower it com-
pletely while pressing the
button.
U.S.A. Canada
181
2
When driving
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
Shift position display
Displays the selected shift position. (P. 175)
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.
Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data. (P. 187)
182
2-2. Instrument cluster
Instrument panel light control
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted by turn-
ing the dial.
Brighter
Darker
■The meters and multi-information display illuminate when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
■The brightness of the instrument panel lights
When the tail lights are turned on, the brightness will be reduced slightly
unless the control dial is turned up fully.
■Engine speed
On hybrid vehicles, engine speed is precisely controlled in order to help
improve fuel efficiency and reduce exhaust emissions etc.
There are times when the engine speed that is displayed may differ even
when vehicle operation and driving conditions are the same.
183
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the engine and its components
This vehicle is not installed with an engine coolant temperature gauge.
Instead, is shown on the multi-information display. The engine may
be overheating if is shown on the multi-information display. In this
case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place. (P. 487)
184
2-2. Instrument cluster
Indicators and warning lights
The indicators and warning lights on the instrument cluster inform
the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.
For the purpose of explanation, the following illustration displays all
indicators and warning lights illuminated.
185
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
■Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the
vehicle’s various systems.
*1: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position (vehicles without a smart key system) or the “POWER”
switch is turned to ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system) to
indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off
after the hybrid system is on, or after a few seconds. There may be
a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights
do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
*2: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.
Turn signal indicator
(P. 178)
Driving ready indicator
(P. 160, 164)
Headlight high beam
indicator (P. 205)
EV drive mode indica-
tor (P. 172)
(U.S.A.)
Headlight indicator
(P. 204)
Shift position indicator
(P. 176)
(Canada)
Tail light indicator
(P. 204)
“ECO MODE” indicator
(P. 176)
(if equipped)
Front fog light indicator
(P. 208)
EV drive indicator lamp
(P. 194)
(if equipped)
Immobilizer system indi-
cator (P. 110) (if equipped)
Cruise control indicator
(P. 217)
(if equipped)
Cruise control set indi-
cator (P. 217)
*1,2
Slip indicator (P. 222)
SRS airbag
on-off indica-
tor (P. 130)
*1
186
2-2. Instrument cluster
CAUTION
■If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as the ABS or SRS warning light not come
on when you start the hybrid system, this could mean that these systems are
not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death
or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immedi-
ately if this occurs.
■Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the
vehicle's systems. (P. 437)
*1: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position (vehicles without a smart key system) or the “POWER”
switch is turned to ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system) to
indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off
after the hybrid system is on, or after a few seconds. There may be
a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights
do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
*2: For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
*3: For vehicles sold in Canada
(red)
(yellow)
(Flashes)
*1, 2
*1, 3
*1
*1, 2
*1, 3
*1
*1, 2
*1, 3
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
187
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Multi-information display
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of
driving-related data including the current outside air temperature.
●Drive information
Displays information such as
the hybrid system operating
conditions and fuel consump-
tion.
●Settings and screen off
Perform operations such as
changing the date/time and
screen settings.
●Warning messages
(P. 447)
Automatically displayed if a
malfunction occurs in one of
the vehicle’s systems.
188
2-2. Instrument cluster
Touch tracer display (vehicles with Display Audio system)
When a steering wheel switch is
touched, an illustration of the
switch is shown on the screen,
helping the driver to confirm
which switch they are touching
without needing to look down at
their hands.
The touch tracer display can be
turned off. (P. 199)
If an audio/navigation system is
used that is not compatible with
the steering switches in this vehi-
cle, the audio switch display may
not operate correctly.
Switching the display
Press the “DISP” switch on the
steering wheel to change the dis-
played item. The “TRIP” switch
may also be used for certain
items.
189
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Items displayed in the upper part of the screen
The following items are always displayed in the upper part of the
screen. (When using some menu items, these items will not be dis-
played.)
Odometer/trip meter
P. 190
Average fuel consumption
Depending on whether the odometer or trip meter is displayed, the
displayed contents differ. Use the displayed average fuel consump-
tion as a reference.
●When the odometer is displayed: the average fuel consumption
since the hybrid system was started is displayed.
●When the trip meter is displayed: the average fuel consumption
since the trip meter was reset is displayed. The average fuel
consumption for trip meter A and trip meter B is displayed sepa-
rately.
When the trip meter is reset, average fuel consumption is also reset.
(P. 190)
Clock
Change the time on the settings screen. (P. 199)
190
2-2. Instrument cluster
■Odometer/trip meter
Each time the “TRIP” switch is pressed, the display changes as fol-
lows:
Odometer
Displays the total distance that the vehicle has been driven.
Some models, pressing and holding the “TRIP” switch will switch the dis-
play between MPH and km/h.
Trip meter
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter
was last reset. The trip meters can be split and used in 2 catego-
ries, A or B.
Pressing and holding the “TRIP” switch will reset the trip meter.
191
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Switching menu screens
Each time the “DISP” switch is pressed, the menu screen changes.
When the desired menu screen is displayed, stop pressing the
“DISP” switch. The details screen will soon be displayed.
However, to display the “Settings & Screen Off” details screen, press
and hold the “DISP” switch after the “Settings & Screen Off” menu
screen is displayed.
“Energy Monitor”
Operating conditions of the hybrid system can be confirmed. (P. 35)
“Drive Information”
Average speed, driving time, EV driving rate/EV driven distance, cruising
range and outside temperature (P. 334) are displayed. (P. 192)
“ECO Score”
Evaluates the level of Eco-friendly driving and displays the results.
(P. 194)
“5min Consumption”*
Displays the average fuel consumption in intervals of 5 minutes. Current
fuel consumption is simultaneously displayed, allowing it to be compared
with previous fuel consumption rates. (P. 39)
192
2-2. Instrument cluster
“ECO Savings”
If the price of gasoline is input, the cost of the consumed fuel according to
the driven distance is displayed. If the fuel consumption comparison is set,
the difference between the input fuel consumption and your vehicle's
actual fuel consumption is expressed as an amount of money that was
possibly saved. (P. 195)
“ECO Savings Record”*
Displays eco savings record. (P. 196)
“Past Record”*
Displays the best 3 fuel consumption records and the current fuel con-
sumption ranking. Fuel consumption can also be displayed by the month.
(P. 40)
“Settings & Screen Off”
Operations such as changing each screen’s setting and the date/time can
be performed. (P. 198)
*: Settings are set to off (initialized settings) at the time of shipping.
(P. 201)
■“Drive Information”
Depending on whether the odometer or trip meter is displayed, the
displayed contents of average speed, driving time, and EV driving
rate/EV driven distance differ.
●When the odometer is displayed: the record since the hybrid sys-
tem was started is displayed.
193
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
●When the trip meter is displayed: the record since the trip meter
was reset is displayed. The record for trip meter A and trip meter B
is displayed separately.
When the trip meter is reset, the record is also reset. (P. 190)
Average speed
Average speed will be displayed.
Driving time
Driving time will be displayed.
EV driving rate/EV driven distance
EV driving rate and driven distance (percentage and distance
driven using just the electric motor [traction motor] only) will be dis-
played.
Cruising range
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with
the quantity of fuel remaining.
• This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption.
As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from
that displayed.
• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display
may not be updated.
Vehicles without a smart key system:
when refueling, turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position. If the
vehicle is refueled without turning the engine switch to the “LOCK”
position, the display may not be updated.
Vehicles with a smart key system:
when refueling, turn the “POWER” switch off. If the vehicle is refu-
eled without turning the “POWER” switch off, the display may not be
updated.
Outside temperature
P. 334
194
2-2. Instrument cluster
■“ECO Score”
Hybrid battery (traction battery) charge level display
EV drive indicator lamp
Illuminates when only the electric motor is used to drive the vehicle
Hybrid System Indicator
Hybrid System Indicator represents the hybrid system power output and
regenerative charging. (P. 197)
Eco driving conditions display
Driving conditions are displayed in 5 stages and divided into 3 categories:
start, cruise and stop. Every time the vehicle is stopped, the score is dis-
played. (Every time the vehicle is accelerated the score that was last dis-
played is reset. Accumulative scores are not calculated.)
195
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
■“ECO Savings”
With 2 types of displays available, the cost of the consumed fuel can
be displayed or the fuel consumption's comparison can be displayed.
Switching between basic display and detailed display can be performed
on the screen settings screen. (P. 200)
Savings and fuel cost
If the fuel consumption comparison is input (P. 200), the possible
savings are displayed. If the fuel consumption comparison has not
been input, your vehicle's actual fuel cost will be displayed.
Depending on whether the odometer or trip meter is displayed, the
displayed contents differ.
●When the odometer is displayed: the savings or fuel cost since
the hybrid system was started is displayed.
●When the trip meter is displayed: the savings or fuel cost since
the trip meter was reset is displayed. The savings or fuel cost for
trip meter A or trip meter B is displayed separately.
When the trip meter is reset, savings or fuel cost is also reset.
(P. 190)
“Fuel Cons. Comparison”
On the settings screen, input the fuel consumption comparison.
(P. 200)
The cost of consumed fuel per mile/kilometer (comparison car)
Based on the fuel consumption comparison, the calculated value is
displayed.
Basic display Detailed display
196
2-2. Instrument cluster
The cost of consumed fuel per mile/kilometer (your car)
The more fuel efficient your driving is, the further left the vehicle
mark moves.
■“ECO Savings Record”
If the fuel consumption compari-
son is input in “ECO Savings”,
the savings history will be dis-
played. If the fuel consumption
comparison is not input, fuel cost
history will be displayed.
Fuel costs for the current month,
the last 3 months and the same
month last year are displayed,
enabling a comparison to be
made.
If the dollar amount exceeds $ 100,
the numerical value will be dis-
played on the graph.
197
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Hybrid System Indicator
Charge area
Shows energy regeneration* status. Regenerated energy will be used to
charge the hybrid battery (traction battery).
*: When used in this manual, “regeneration” refers to the conversion of
energy created by the movement of the vehicle into electrical energy.
Hybrid Eco area
Shows that gasoline engine power is not being used very often.
The gasoline engine will automatically stop and restart under various con-
ditions.
Eco area
Shows that the vehicle is being driven in an Eco-friendly manner.
Power area
Shows that the driving power is more than the upper limit of Eco driving.
(during full power driving etc.)
Keeping the indicator within Eco area can help Eco-friendly driving.
198
2-2. Instrument cluster
Screen settings
If “Settings & Screen Off” is selected on the menu screen, the follow-
ing items can be set. Always perform this operation after stopping the
vehicle in a safe place. (Some items cannot be set while driving.)
Press the “DISP” switch on the
steering wheel to move the cur-
sor. To switch to the settings
screen, press and hold the
“DISP” switch while the cursor is
on the desired item.
199
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
■Basic settings/Changing the clock shortcut
The date, time, clock mode (12 or 24 hour), touch tracer settings and
the displayed language can be changed.
●Pressing the “DISP” (forward) or “TRIP” (back) switch changes the
date.
●Press the “DISP” switch to select hours or minutes. Pressing the
“TRIP” switch adjusts the hours or minutes.
●If set clock is selected, the screen will change to the clock settings
screen.
200
2-2. Instrument cluster
■“ECO savings” settings
The gasoline price and fuel consumption comparison settings can be
set, and the screen settings can be changed between basic and
detailed.
●To input the gasoline price, press the “DISP” (to increase) or
“TRIP” (to reduce) switch.
When the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without a
smart key system) or the “POWER” switch is turned to ON mode (vehicles
with a smart key system) after refueling, the gasoline price input screen is
automatically displayed.
●To input the fuel consumption comparison, press the “DISP” (to
increase) or “TRIP” (to reduce) switch.
When the fuel consumption comparison is input, the estimated savings in
fuel costs are displayed. If the fuel consumption comparison is not input,
the cost of the consumed fuel will be displayed.
201
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
■Menu screen selection
The following screen changes
and settings can be performed:
• The eco savings record
screen can be switched on or
off.
• The 5 minute fuel consump-
tion screen can be switched
on or off.
• Past record can be reset.
• The past record screen can be
switched between off, monthly
average and personal best.
■Screen off
The screen can be turned off.
The upper part of the screen is always displayed and cannot be turned off.
Trip summary display
When the hybrid system is
turned off, drive information data
since the system was started is
displayed after the ending ani-
mation.
When the doors are locked, the
screen turns off.
202
2-2. Instrument cluster
■The clock is displayed when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
■Eco score
●As the accelerator pedal is not depressed, the driven distance using
cruise control (if equipped) is not included in the eco score.
●As the eco score evaluation differs according to driving conditions and
environmental factors, in some cases it may not be linked to fuel con-
sumption.
■Eco savings
●Fuel cost and savings should be used as a guide only.
●Depending on refueling methods, driving conditions and environmental
factors, the actual and displayed fuel costs may differ.
●In some cases, fuel cost and savings may not be linked to the eco score
evaluation.
■When disconnecting and reconnecting 12-volt battery terminals
The following information data will be reset:
●Clock
●Past record (aside from the top 3 results)
●Average fuel consumption
●Cruising range
●Average vehicle speed
●Driving time
●EV driving rate/EV driven distance
Additionally, some displays may return to their default settings.
■Liquid crystal display
Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is
characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to
use the display.
203
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
CAUTION
■Eco score
Eco score should be used as a guide only. Always drive safely in accor-
dance with road and traffic conditions.
NOTICE
■The multi-information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal
information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display
monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
204
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated manually.
Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows:
Type A
The daytime running
lights turn on.
The side marker,
parking, tail, license
plate, daytime run-
ning lights and instru-
ment panel lights turn
on.
The headlights and
all lights listed above
(except daytime run-
ning lights) turn on.
The daytime running
lights turn off.
205
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
Turning on the high beam headlights
With the headlights on, push
the lever away from you to
turn on the high beams.
Pull the lever toward you to the
center position to turn the high
beams off.
Pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the high
beams once.
You can flash the high beams
with the headlights on or off.
Type B
The daytime running
lights turn on.
The side marker,
parking, tail, license
plate, daytime run-
ning lights and instru-
ment panel lights turn
on.
The headlights and
all lights listed above
(except daytime run-
ning lights) turn on.
206
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
■Daytime running light system
●To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the headlights turn on
automatically (at a reduced intensity) whenever the hybrid system is
started and the parking brake is released. Daytime running lights are not
designed for use at night.
For type A: Daytime running lights can be turned off by operating the
switch.
●Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system
offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help
improve fuel economy.
■Light reminder buzzer
Vehicles without a smart key system
A buzzer sounds when the engine switch is turned to the “LOCK” or “ACC”
position and the driver's door is opened while the lights are turned on.
Vehicles with a smart key system
A buzzer sounds when the “POWER” switch is turned off or turned to
ACCESSORY mode and the driver's door is opened while the lights are
turned on.
■Battery-saving function
In the following conditions, the remaining lights will go off automatically after
20 minutes in order to prevent the vehicle battery from being discharged:
●The headlights and/or tail lights are on.
●The engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position (vehicles
without a smart key system) or the “POWER” switch is turned to ACCES-
SORY mode or turned off (vehicles with a smart key system).
This function will be canceled in any of the following situations:
●When the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without a
smart key system) or the “POWER” switch is turned to ON mode (vehi-
cles with a smart key system).
●When the light switch is operated.
●When the door is opened or closed.
207
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
■Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Setting of the daytime running light system can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 522)
NOTICE
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is
off.
208
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Fog light switch
: If equipped
The fog lights secure excellent visibility in difficult driving condi-
tions, such as in rain and fog.
Type A
Turns the front fog
lights off
Turns the front fog
lights on
209
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
■Fog lights can be used when
The headlights are on in low beam.
Type B
Turns the front fog
lights off
Turns the front fog
lights on
210
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Windshield wipers and washer
The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows:
Type A
Intermittent wind-
shield wiper opera-
tion
Low speed wind-
shield wiper opera-
tion
High speed wind-
shield wiper opera-
tion
Temporary operation
Increases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency*
Decreases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency*
*: The interval adjuster may not
be equipped depending on
vehicle grade.
211
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
Washer/wiper dual opera-
tion
The wipers will automatically
operate a couple of times after
the washer squirts.
Type B
Intermittent wind-
shield wiper opera-
tion
Low speed wind-
shield wiper opera-
tion
High speed wind-
shield wiper opera-
tion
Temporary operation
Increases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency*
Decreases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency*
*: The interval adjuster may not
be equipped depending on
vehicle grade.
212
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
■The windshield wipers and washer can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
■If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.
CAUTION
■Caution regarding the use of washer fluid
When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes
warm. The fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This
may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
Washer/wiper dual opera-
tion
The wipers will automatically
operate a couple of times after
the washer squirts.
213
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
NOTICE
■When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may over-
heat.
■When a nozzle becomes blocked
In this case, contact your Toyota dealer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
214
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Rear window wiper and washer
: If equipped
The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows:
Type A
Intermittent window
wiper operation
Normal window wiper
operation
Washer/wiper dual
operation
Washer/wiper dual
operation
The wipers will automatically
operate a couple of times after
the washer squirts.
215
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
■The rear window wiper and washer can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
■If no washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzle is not blocked if there is washer fluid in the
washer fluid reservoir.
Type B
Intermittent window
wiper operation
Normal window wiper
operation
Washer/wiper dual
operation
Washer/wiper dual
operation
The wipers will automatically
operate a couple of times after
the washer squirts.
216
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
NOTICE
■When the rear window is dry
Do not use the wiper, as it may damage the rear window.
■When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may over-
heat.
■When a nozzle becomes blocked
In this case, contact your Toyota dealer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
217
2
When driving
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control
: If equipped
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
Indicators
Cruise control switch
■Setting the vehicle speed
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Cruise control indicator will
come on.
Press the button again to
deactivate the cruise control.
Accelerate or decelerate the
vehicle to the desired speed,
and push the lever down to set
the speed.
“SET” indicator will come on.
The vehicle speed at the
moment the lever is released
becomes the set speed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
218
2-4. Using other driving systems
■Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set
speed is obtained.
Increases the speed
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily
move the lever in the desired
direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the
lever in the desired direction.
The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the
lever is operated.
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased con-
tinually until the lever is released.
■Canceling and resuming the constant speed control
Pulling the lever toward you
cancels the constant speed
control.
The speed setting is also can-
celed when the brakes are
applied.
Pushing the lever up
resumes the constant
speed control.
Resuming is available when
the vehicle speed is more than
approximately 25 mph (40
km/h).
219
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■Cruise control can be set when
●The shift lever is in D.
●Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
■Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
●The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set
speed resumes.
●Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be
increased by first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then
pushing the lever down to set the new speed.
■Automatic cruise control cancelation
Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following
situations.
●Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h)
below the preset vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
●Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
●VSC is activated.
■If “CHECK CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM” is shown on the multi-infor-
mation display
Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press
the button again to reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels
immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise
control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
220
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.
■Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting
in death or serious injury.
●In heavy traffic
●On roads with sharp bends
●On winding roads
●On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
●On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
221
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
Driving assist systems
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following sys-
tems operate automatically in response to various driving situations.
Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and
should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.
■ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if
the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface
■Brake assist
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation
■VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning
on slippery road surfaces
■TRAC (Traction Control)
Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spin-
ning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads
■Hill-start assist control
Helps to prevent the vehicle from rolling backward when starting on an
incline
■EPS (Electric Power Steering)
Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn
the steering wheel
222
2-4. Using other driving systems
When the TRAC/VSC/ABS systems are operating
The slip indicator light will flash
while the TRAC/VSC/ABS sys-
tems are operating.
■Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, TRAC, VSC
and hill-start assist control systems
●A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the hybrid
system is started or just after the vehicle begins to move, if the brake
pedal is depressed forcefully or repeatedly, or 1 - 2 minuets after the
hybrid system is stopped. This sound does not indicate that a malfunc-
tion has occurred in any of these systems.
●Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are
operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.
• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.
■EPS operation sound
When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may
be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.
■Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system
The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from
overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of
time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur,
refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the hybrid
system off. The EPS system should return to normal within 10 minutes.
223
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■Operating conditions of hill-start assist control
When the following four conditions are met, the hill-start assist control will
operate:
●The shift lever is in a position other than P or N (when starting off for-
ward/backward on an upward incline).
●The vehicle is stopped.
●The accelerator pedal is not depressed.
●The parking brake is not engaged.
■Automatic system cancelation of hill-start assist control
The hill-start assist control will turn off in any of the following situations:
●The shift lever is moved to P or N.
●The accelerator pedal is depressed.
●The parking brake is engaged.
●Approximately 2 seconds elapse after the brake pedal is released.
224
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■The ABS does not operate effectively when
●The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded (such as
excessively worn tires on a snow covered road).
●The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick roads.
■Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of nor-
mal conditions
The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, especially in the fol-
lowing situations:
●When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
●When driving with tire chains
●When driving over bumps in the road
●When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces
■TRAC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slip-
pery road surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating.
Drive the vehicle carefully in conditions where stability and power may be
lost.
■Hill-start assist control
●Do not overly rely on hill-start assist control. Hill-start assist control may
not operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered with ice.
●Unlike the parking brake, hill-start assist control is not intended to hold the
vehicle stationary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use
hill-start assist control to hold the vehicle on an incline, as doing so may
lead to an accident.
225
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
CAUTION
■When the TRAC/VSC/ABS are activated
The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may
cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes.
■Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and
total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the
recommended tire inflation pressure level.
The ABS, TRAC and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires
are installed on the vehicle.
Contact your Toyota dealer for further information when replacing tires or
wheels.
■Handling of tires and the suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect
the driving assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction.
226
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage
Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
(1)Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's
placard.
(2)Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
(3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4)The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and lug-
gage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 150) =
650 lbs.)
(5)Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
Take notice of the following information about storage precau-
tions, cargo capacity and load:
●Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever
possible.
●Be sure all items are secured in place.
●To maintain vehicle balance while driving, position luggage
evenly within the luggage compartment.
●For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.
227
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
(P. 496)
Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your
vehicle is not designed for trailer towing.
Calculation formula for your vehicle
Cargo capacity
Total load capacity (vehicle
capacity weight) (P. 496)
When 2 people with the combined weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in
your vehicle, which has a total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight)
of B lb. (kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity
will be C lb. (kg) as follows:
B*2 lb. (kg) - A*1 lb. (kg) = C*3 lb. (kg)
*1: A =Weight of people
*2: B =Total load capacity
*3: C =Available cargo and luggage load
In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of D lb.
(kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced E lb. (kg)
as follows:
C lb. (kg) - D*4 lb. (kg) = E*5 lb. (kg)
*4: D =Additional weight of people
*5: E =Available cargo and luggage load
228
2-5. Driving information
As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants
increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount
that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In
other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an
excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus
cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on
your vehicle.
CAUTION
■Things that must not be carried in the luggage compartment
The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the luggage compart-
ment:
●Receptacles containing gasoline
●Aerosol cans
■Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever possi-
ble.
●Do not stack cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment higher
than the seatbacks.
Such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the
vehicle in the event of sudden braking or in an accident.
●Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the
item may get under the brake or accelerator pedal and prevent the
pedals from being depressed properly, block the driver’s vision, or hit
the driver or passengers, causing an accident:
• At the feet of the driver
• On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
• On the luggage cover (if equipped)
• On the instrument panel
• On the dashboard
229
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
CAUTION
●Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and
injure someone during sudden braking, sudden swerving or an acci-
dent.
●When you fold down the rear seats, long items should not be placed
directly behind the front seats.
●Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is not
designed for passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat
belts properly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer
death or serious bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident.
■Capacity and distribution
●Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle
weight rating.
●Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less
than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper
loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which
may cause death or serious injury.
230
2-5. Driving information
Vehicle load limits
■Total load capacity and seating capacity
These details are also described on the tire and loading information
label. (P. 392)
CAUTION
■Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and
braking ability, resulting in an accident.
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity,
towing capacity and cargo capacity.
■Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight): (P. 496)
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants,
cargo and luggage.
■Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose
estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.
■Towing capacity
Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.
■Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight
and the number of occupants.
231
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving
the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropri-
ate to the prevailing weather conditions.
■Pre-winter preparations
●Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside tem-
peratures.
• Engine oil
• Engine/power control unit coolant
• Washer fluid
●Have a service technician inspect the condition of the 12-volt
battery.
●Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set
of tire chains for the front tires.
Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains
match the size of the tires.
■Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according to the driving conditions:
●Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is
frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice.
Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
●To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan,
remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents
in front of the windshield.
●Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have
accumulated on the exterior lights, vehicle's roof, chassis,
around the tires or on the brakes.
●Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes
before getting in the vehicle.
232
2-5. Driving information
Selecting tire chains
Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the tire chains. Chain
size is regulated for each tire size.
Side chain
(0.12 in. [3.0 mm] in diameter)
Cross chain
(0.16 in. [4.0 mm] in diameter)
Regulations on the use of tire chains
Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on loca-
tion and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing
chains.
■When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you
and the vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to
road conditions.
■When parking the vehicle
Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the
parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it
from being released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent
inadvertent sliding or creeping.
233
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
■Tire chain installation
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:
●Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
●Install tire chains on the front tires only. Do not install tire chains on the
rear tires.
●Install tire chains on front tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains
after driving 1/4 1/2 mile (0.5 1.0 km).
●Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.
CAUTION
■Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or
serious injury.
●Use tires of the size specified.
●Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
●Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of
snow tires being used.
●Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
234
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
■Driving with tire chains
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely,
and may cause death or serious injury.
●Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being
used, or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
●Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
●Avoid sudden turns and braking, as use of chains may adversely affect
vehicle handling.
●Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle con-
trol is maintained.
NOTICE
■Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Toyota dealers or legiti-
mate tire retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the opera-
tion of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.
■Fitting tire chains
The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly
when tire chains are fitted.
235
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Trailer towing
Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.
Toyota also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or
the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc.
Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow
hitch mounted carriers.
236
2-5. Driving information
Dinghy towing
NOTICE
■To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not tow your vehicle with the four wheels on the ground.
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on
the ground) behind a motor home.
237
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
238
2-5. Driving information
Interior features 3
237
3-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning
system ........................... 238
Rear window and
outside rear view
mirror defoggers ............ 247
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system types.......... 248
Using the radio................. 254
Using the CD player......... 256
Playing back MP3
and WMA discs.............. 261
Operating an iPod............ 268
Operating a USB
memory.......................... 276
Optimal use of the
audio system.................. 284
Using the AUX port .......... 287
Using the steering
wheel audio switches..... 288
3-3. Using the Bluetooth®
audio system
Bluetooth® audio/
phone............................. 291
Using the Bluetooth®
audio/phone................... 295
Operating a Bluetooth®
enabled portable
player............................. 300
Making a phone call......... 303
Using the “SET UP” menu
(“Bluetooth” menu)......... 308
Using the “SET UP” menu
(“Phone” menu).............. 314
3-4. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list............... 321
• Interior lights/
personal lights................ 322
3-5. Using the storage
features
List of storage features .... 324
• Glove box........................ 325
• Console box................... 325
• Auxiliary boxes............... 327
• Cup holders ................... 329
• Bottle holders................. 330
3-6. Other interior features
Sun visors ........................ 332
Vanity mirrors................... 333
Outside temperature
display............................ 334
Power outlet..................... 336
Seat heaters..................... 337
Coat hooks....................... 339
Assist grips....................... 340
Floor mat.......................... 341
Luggage cover ................. 343
238
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning system
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the
temperature setting.
Temperature control dial
“OFF” button
Temperature display
Fan speed display
Air outlet display
Cooling and dehumidification
function on/off button Windshield
defogger button
Automatic mode button
Fan speed control button
Air outlet selector button
Outside/recirculated
air mode button
239
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Using the automatic air conditioning system
Press .
The air conditioning system begins to operate. Air outlets and
fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temper-
ature setting.
To adjust the temperature setting, turn clockwise to
increase the temperature and turn counterclockwise to
decrease the temperature.
■Automatic mode indicator
If fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the automatic
mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for functions
other than that operated are maintained.
Adjusting the settings manually
To adjust the fan speed, press “” on to increase the
fan speed and “” to decrease the fan speed.
Press to turn the fan off.
To adjust the temperature setting, turn clockwise to
increase the temperature and turn counterclockwise to
decrease the temperature.
To change the air outlets, press .
The air outlets used are switched each time the button is pressed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
240
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Defogging the windshield
Press .
The dehumidification function
operates and fan speed
increases.
Set the outside/recirculated air
mode button to the outside air
mode if the recirculated air mode
is used. (It may switch automati-
cally.)
To defog the windshield and the
side windows early, turn the air
flow and temperature up.
To return to the previous mode,
press again when the
windshield is defogged.
Air outlets and air flow
Air flows to the upper body.
241
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Air flows to the upper body and
feet.
: Some models
Air flows mainly to the feet.
*: When the warming function is
operating, air flows to the upper
body as well to warm the upper
body effectively.
: Some models
Air flows to the feet and the
windshield defogger operates.
: Some models
242
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press .
The mode switches between outside air mode (the indicator is off) and
recirculated air mode (the indicator is on) each time the button is pressed.
Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
Center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Right and left side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
243
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Open the vent.
Close the vent.
Steering wheel switches
Temperature control
Press “” on to increase
the temperature and “” to
decrease the temperature.
Outside air or recirculated air
mode
The mode switches between out-
side air mode and recirculated air
mode each time is pressed.
244
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode
In Eco drive mode, the air conditioning system is controlled as follows to pri-
oritize fuel efficiency:
●Heating/cooling capacity is restricted.
●Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on
the temperature setting or the inside temperature.
●Fan speed restricted when automatic mode is selected
To improve air conditioning performance, perform the following operations:
●Adjust the fan speed or the temperature setting
●Turn off Eco drive mode
■Using automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting
and the ambient conditions.
Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow
immediately after is pressed.
■Fogging up of the windows
●The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high.
Turning on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the
windshield effectively.
●If you turn off, the windows may fog up more easily.
●The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.
245
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
■Outside/recirculated air mode
●When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the
outside/recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is
effective in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. Dur-
ing cooling operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the
vehicle interior effectively.
●Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on
the temperature setting or the inside temperature.
■When the outside temperature exceeds 75F (24C) and the air condi-
tioning system is on
●In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air condi-
tioning system may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This
may also reduce fuel consumption.
●Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the engine
switch is turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without a smart key sys-
tem) or the “POWER” switch is turned to ON mode (vehicles with a smart
key system).
●It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing
.
■When the outside temperature falls to nearly 32F (0C)
The dehumidification function may not operate even when is
pressed.
■Air conditioning odors
●During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter
into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause
odor to be emitted from the vents.
●To reduce potential odors from occurring:
• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air
mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time
immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic
mode.
246
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■Air conditioning filter
P. 399
■When operating the steering switches
P. 188
■Customization
The air conditioning control of Eco drive mode can be changed to the same
setting as that used in normal drive mode.
(Customizable features P. 522)
CAUTION
■To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather.
The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the
windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking
your vision.
NOTICE
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
hybrid system is off.
247
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
■The defoggers can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
■The outside rear view mirror defoggers (if equipped)
Turning the rear window defogger on will turn the outside rear view mirror
defoggers on.
CAUTION
■When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on (if equipped)
Do not touch the outside surface of the rear view mirrors, as they can
become very hot and burn you.
Defoggers are used to defog the rear window, and to remove rain-
drops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.
Turns the defoggers on/off
The defoggers will automati-
cally turn off after approxi-
mately 15 minutes.
248
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system types
Without Display Audio system
CD player and AM/FM radio
Title Page
Using the radio P. 254
Using the CD player P. 256
Playing back MP3 and WMA discs P. 261
Operating an iPod P. 268
Operating a USB memory P. 276
Optimal use of the audio system P. 284
Using the AUX port P. 287
249
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■About Bluetooth®
The Bluetooth wordmark and logo are owned by Bluetooth SIG. and
permission has been granted to use the trademark of the licensee
Panasonic Corporation. Other trademarks and trade names are owned by
various different owners.
With Display Audio system
Owners of models equipped with a Display Audio system should
refer to the “Display Audio System Owner's Manual”.
250
3-2. Using the audio system
CAUTION
■U.S.A. (without Display Audio system)
Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC ID: ACJ932PTA184
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Expo-
sure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low
levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive
exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and
operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away from person’s
body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
■Canada (without Display Audio system)
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS stan-
dard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables
aux appareils radio exempts de licence.
L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne
doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible
d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
251
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
CAUTION
Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate
using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the
transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to
other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the
equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that neces-
sary for successful communication.
Conformément à la réglementation d'Industrie Canada, le présent émetteur
radio peut fonctionner avec une antenne d'un type et d'un gain maximal (ou
inférieur) approuvé pour l'émetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de
réduire les risques de brouillage radioélectrique à l'intention des autres utili-
sateurs, il faut choisir le type d'antenne et son gain de sorte que la puis-
sance isotrope rayonnée équivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne dépasse pas l'intensité
nécessaire à l'établissement d'une communication satisfaisante.
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment and meets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency
(RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it
deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation
(MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the
radiator at least 20cm or more away from person’s body (excluding extremi-
ties: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements
énoncées pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles
d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l’IC. Cet
équipement émet une énergie RF très faible qui est considérée conforme
sans évaluation de l’exposition maximale autorisée.
Cependant, cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une dis-
tance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l’exception
des extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
252
3-2. Using the audio system
CAUTION
■For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. (with Display Audio system)
FCC ID: BABFT0032A
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for
uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure
Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels
of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive expo-
sure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and oper-
ated with at least 20cm and more between the radiator and person's body
(excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
Co-location: This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunc-
tion with any other antenna or transmitter.
253
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■For vehicles sold in Canada (with Display Audio system)
IC: 2024B-FT0032A
CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for
uncontrolled equipment and meets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF)
Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it
deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation
(MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least
20cm and more between the radiator and person’s body (excluding extremi-
ties: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
This Category II radiocommunication device complies with Industry Canada
Standard RSS-310.
Ce dispositif de radiocommunication de catégorie II respecte la norme CNR-
310 d’Industrie Canada.
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS stan-
dard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables
aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux
deux conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique
subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionne-
ment.
NOTICE
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the hybrid
system is off.
■To avoid damaging the audio system
Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.
254
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the radio
Setting station presets
Search for desired stations by turning or pressing “”
or “” on .
Press and hold a desired station selector button until you hear
a beep.
Volume
Scanning for
receivable stations
Station selector
Seeking
the frequency
Adjusting the
frequency or
selecting items
AM/FM mode
button
Power
STEP
1
STEP
2
255
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Scanning radio stations
■Scanning the preset radio stations
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each.
When the desired station is reached, press again.
■Scanning all the radio stations within range
Press .
All the stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each.
When the desired station is reached, press again.
■When the 12-volt battery is disconnected
Preset stations are erased.
■Reception sensitivity
●Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the con-
tinually changing position of the antenna when driving, differences in sig-
nal strength and surrounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.
●When is used, automatic station selection may not be possi-
ble.
●The radio antenna is mounted on the rear roof. The antenna can be
removed from the base by turning it.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage, remove the antenna in the following cases.
●The antenna will touch the ceiling of a garage.
●A car cover will be put on the roof.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
256
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the CD player
Loading CDs
Insert a CD.
Ejecting CDs
Press and remove the CD.
Selecting a track
Turn or press “” to move up or “” to move down using
until the desired track number is displayed.
Random playback
Repeat play
Playback
CD eject
Search playback
Displays text message
VolumePower
Selecting a track
Selecting a
track or displays
track list
Fast-forwarding
or reversing
257
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Selecting a track from a track list
Press .
The track list will be displayed.
Turn and press to select a track.
To return to the previous display, press (BACK).
Scanning tracks
Press .
The first 10 seconds of each track will be played.
Press again when the desired track is reached.
Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold ( ) or
().
Random playback
Press (RDM).
To cancel, press (RDM) again.
Repeat play
Press (RPT).
To cancel, press (RPT) again.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
258
3-2. Using the audio system
Switching the display
Press .
To return to the previous display, press or (BACK).
■Display
Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.
If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding for 1
second or more will display the remaining characters.
A maximum of 64 characters can be displayed.
If is pressed for 1 second or more again, or has not been pressed
for 6 seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters.
Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed
properly or may not be displayed at all.
■Error messages
“ERROR”: This indicates a problem either in the CD or inside the player.
“CD CHECK”: The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side down.
“WAIT”: Operation has stopped due to a high temperature inside the
player. Wait for a while and then press . If the CD
still cannot be played back, contact your Toyota dealer.
■Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc fea-
tures, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
CDs with copy-protect features may not be used.
■CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when
a problem is detected while the CD player is being used.
259
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■Certification for the CD player
This product is a class I laser product.
Do not open the cover of the player or attempt to repair the unit yourself.
Refer servicing to qualified personnel.
NOTICE
■CDs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of CDs.
Also, do not use 8 cm (3 in.) CD adapters, DualDiscs or printable discs.
Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function.
●CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7
in. (12 cm)
●Low-quality and deformed CDs
260
3-2. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■CD player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the
CDs or the player itself.
●Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.
●Do not apply oil to the CD player.
●Store CDs away from direct sunlight.
●Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.
■If a CD is left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for
extended periods
The CD may be damaged and may not play properly.
■Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
●CDs with a transparent or translucent
recording area
●CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-
R labels attached to them, or that have
had the label peeled off
261
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Playing back MP3 and WMA discs
Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs
P. 256
Selecting a folder
■Selecting folders one at a time
Press ( ) or ( ) to select the desired folder.
■Selecting a folder and file from a folder list
Press .
The folder list will be displayed.
VolumePower
Selecting a file
or displays
folder list
Random playback
Repeat play
Playback
Disc eject
Search playback
Displays text message
Selecting a folder, fast-
forwarding or reversing
Selecting a file
STEP
1
262
3-2. Using the audio system
Turn and press to select a folder and a file.
To return to the previous display, press (BACK).
■Returning to the first folder
Press and hold ( ) until you hear a beep.
Scanning a folder
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
The first 10 seconds of the first file in the each folder will be played.
When the desired folder is reached, press again.
Selecting files
Turn or press “” or “” on to select the desired file.
Scanning files
Press .
The first 10 seconds of all files in the folder will be played.
When the desired file is reached, press again.
Fast-forwarding and reversing files
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold ( ) or
().
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
263
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Random playback
Pressing (RDM) changes modes in the following order:
Folder random Disc random Off
Repeat play
Pressing (RPT) changes modes in the following order:
File repeat Folder repeat* Off
*: Available except when RDM (random playback) is selected
Switching the display
Press .
Track title, Artist name and Album title (MP3 only) are shown on the dis-
play.
To return to the previous display, press or (BACK).
264
3-2. Using the audio system
■Display
P. 258
■Error messages
“ERROR”: This indicates a problem either in the CD or inside the
player.
“CD CHECK”: The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side down.
“NO SUPPORT”: This indicates that MP3/WMA files are not included in the
CD.
■Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc fea-
tures, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
■CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when
a problem is detected while the CD player is being used.
265
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using
MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3
format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards and to the media/formats
recorded by them that can be used.
●MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224,
256, 320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128,
144, 160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and
monaural
●WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)
266
3-2. Using the audio system
●Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-
RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible, depending on the status
of the CD-R or CD-RW. Playback may not be possible or the audio may
jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.
●Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used.
• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above
may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not
be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255
●File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those
with the extension .mp3 or .wma.
●Multi-sessions
As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play
discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can
be played.
●ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track
title, artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags.
(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the
track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
267
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
●MP3 and WMA playback
When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc
are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file
is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you
do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnec-
essary folders.
If the discs contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data,
only music data can be played.
●Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and
WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and
WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage
to the speakers.
●Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit
rate of 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances,
depending on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for
MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the
encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of
playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at
all.
• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may
take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may
not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trade-
marks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
NOTICE
■CDs and adapters that cannot be used (P. 259)
■CD player precautions (P. 260)
■If a CD is left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for
extended periods (P. 260)
■Lens cleaners (P. 260)
268
3-2. Using the audio system
Operating an iPod
Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle
speakers.
■Connecting an iPod
Open the cover and connect
an iPod using an iPod cable.
Turn on the power of the iPod if
it is not turned on.
Press .
■Control panel
STEP
1
STEP
2
iPod menu
mode
VolumePower
Selecting an iPod
menu/song or
displays song list
Shuffle playback
Repeat play
Playback
Selecting a song
Displays text message
Adjusting sound quality
and volume balance
Fast-forwarding
or reversing
269
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Selecting a play mode
Press (BROWSE) to select iPod menu mode.
Turning clockwise changes the play mode in the fol-
lowing order:
“Playlists”“Artists”“Albums”“Songs”“Podcasts”“Genres”
“Composers”“Audiobooks”
Press to select the desired play mode.
■Play mode list
Play mode First
selection
Second
selection
Third
selection
Fourth
selection
“Playlists”
Playlists
select
Songs
select --
“Artists” Artists select Albums
select
Songs
select -
“Albums” Albums
select
Songs
select --
“Songs” Songs
select ---
“Podcasts” Podcasts
select
Episodes
select --
“Genres” Genre select Artists select Albums
select
Songs
select
“Composers”
Composers
select
Albums
select
Songs
select -
“Audiobooks”
Audiobooks
select
Chapters
select --
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
270
3-2. Using the audio system
■Selecting a list
Turn to display the first selection list.
Press to select the desired item.
Pressing the knob changes to the second selection list.
Repeat the same procedure to select the desired item.
To return to the previous selection list, press (BACK).
Selecting songs
Turn or press “” or “” on to select the desired song.
Selecting a song from the song list
Press .
The song list will be displayed.
Turn to select a song.
Press to play the song.
To return to the previous display, press (BACK).
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
271
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Fast-forwarding and reversing songs
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold ( ) or
().
Shuffle playback
Pressing (RDM) changes modes in the following order:
Track shuffle Album shuffle Off
Repeat play
Press
(RPT).
To cancel, press (RPT) again.
Switching the display
Press .
Track title, Artist name and Album title are shown on the display.
To return to the previous display, press or (BACK).
Adjusting sound quality and volume balance
Press to enter iPod menu mode.
Press to change sound modes. (P. 284)
STEP
1
STEP
2
272
3-2. Using the audio system
■Cord hook
■About iPod
●“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic acces-
sory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone,
respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple per-
formance standards.
●Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance
with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this
accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance.
●iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano and iPod touch are trademarks of
Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
A cord can be secured as shown in the
illustration.
Cords with a diameter of approximately
0.2 in. (5 mm) can be secured.
273
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■iPod functions
●When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod
mode, the iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last
used.
●Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions
may not be available. If a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as
opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and recon-
necting it once again may resolve the problem.
●While connected to the system, the iPod cannot be operated with its own
controls. It is necessary to use the controls of the vehicle’s audio system
instead.
■iPod problems
To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect
your iPod from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it.
For instructions on how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner’s Man-
ual.
■Display
P. 258
■Error messages
“iPod ERROR”: This indicates that the data in the iPod cannot be read.
“ERROR 3”: This indicates that the iPod may be malfunctioning.
“ERROR 4”: This indicates that an over current error has occurred.
“ERROR 5”: This indicates that an iPod communication error has
occurred.
“ERROR 6”: This indicates that an authentication error has occurred.
“NO SONGS”: This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.
“NO PLAYLIST”: This indicates that some available songs are not found in
a selected playlist.
“UPDATE YOUR iPod”: This indicates that the version of the iPod is not
compatible. Upgrade your iPod software to the lat-
est version.
274
3-2. Using the audio system
■Compatible models
The following iPod, iPod nano, iPod classic, iPod touch and iPhone
devices can be used with this system.
●Made for
• iPod touch (4th generation)
• iPod touch (3rd generation)
• iPod touch (2nd generation)
• iPod touch (1st generation)
• iPod classic
• iPod with video
• iPod nano (6th generation)
• iPod nano (5th generation)
• iPod nano (4th generation)
• iPod nano (3rd generation)
• iPod nano (2nd generation)
• iPod nano (1st generation)
• iPhone 4
• iPhone 3GS
• iPhone 3G
• iPhone
Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some
models might be incompatible with this system.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
●Maximum number of lists in device: 9999
●Maximum number of songs in device: 65535
●Maximum number of songs per list: 65535
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not connect iPod or operate the controls.
275
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
NOTICE
■Cord hook
Do not secure items other than cords on the cord hook. Doing so may dam-
age the cord hook.
■To prevent damage to iPod
●Do not leave iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may
become high, resulting in damage to the iPod.
●Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is
connected as this may damage the iPod or its terminal.
●Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the iPod or
its terminal.
276
3-2. Using the audio system
Operating a USB memory
Connecting a USB memory enables you to enjoy music from the
vehicle speakers.
■Connecting a USB memory
Open the cover and connect a
USB memory.
Turn on the power of the USB
memory if it is not turned on.
Press .
■Control panel
STEP
1
STEP
2
VolumePower
Selecting a file
or displays
folder list
Random playback
Repeat play
Playback
Search playback
Selecting a file
Displays text message
Selecting a folder, fast-
forwarding or reversing
277
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Selecting a folder
■Selecting folders one at a time
To select the desired folder, press ( ) or ( ).
■Selecting a folder and file from a folder list
Press .
The folder list will be displayed.
Turn and press to select a folder and a file.
To return to the previous display, press (BACK).
■Returning to the first folder
Press and hold ( ) until you hear a beep.
Scanning a folder
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
The first 10 seconds of the first file in the each folder will be played.
When the desired folder is reached, press again.
Selecting files
Turn , or press “” or “” on to select the desired file.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
278
3-2. Using the audio system
Scanning files
Press .
The first 10 seconds of all files in the folder will be played.
When the desired folder is reached, press again.
Fast-forwarding and reversing files
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold ( ) or
().
Random playback
Pressing (RDM) changes modes in the following order:
Folder random Disc random Off
Repeat play
Pressing (RPT) changes modes in the following order:
File repeat Folder repeat* Off
*: Available except when RDM (random playback) is selected
Switching the display
Press .
Track title, Artist name and Album title (MP3 only) are shown on the dis-
play.
To return to the previous display, press or (BACK).
STEP
1
STEP
2
279
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■Cord hook
P. 272
■USB memory functions
●Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, the
device itself may not be operable and certain functions may not be avail-
able. If the device is inoperable or a function is unavailable due to a mal-
function (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device
and reconnecting it once again may resolve the problem.
●If the USB memory still does not begin operation after being discon-
nected and reconnected, format the memory.
■Display
P. 258
■Error messages
“ERROR”: This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connection.
“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the USB
memory.
280
3-2. Using the audio system
■USB memory
●Compatible devices
USB memory that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback
●Compatible device formats
The following device formats can be used:
• USB communication formats: USB2.0 FS (12 Mbps)
• File formats: FAT12/16/32 (Windows)
• Correspondence class: Mass storage class
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above
may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be
displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum number of folders in a device: 999 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files in a device: 9999
• Maximum number of files per folder: 255
●MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using
MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3
format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and
to the media/formats on which the files are recorded.
281
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
●MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERIII, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERIII, MPEG2.5)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
MPEG2.5: 8, 11.025, 12 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-160 (kbps)
MPEG2.5: 8-160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and
monaural
●WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
HIGH PROFILE 48-320 (kbps, CBR)
●File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those
with the extension .mp3 or .wma.
●ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track
title, artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3
tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the
track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
282
3-2. Using the audio system
●MP3 and WMA playback
• When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is connected, all files in
the USB memory are checked. Once the file check is finished, the first
MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly,
we recommend that you do not include any files other than MP3 or
WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.
• When the USB memory is connected and the audio source is changed
to USB memory mode, the USB memory will start playing the first file in
the first folder. If the same device is removed and reinserted (and the
contents have not been changed), the USB memory will resume play
from the same point in which it was last used.
●Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and
WMA files, they will be skipped (not played).
●Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit
rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for
MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the
encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of
playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at
all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not connect USB memory or operate the controls.
283
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
NOTICE
■Cord hook (P. 275)
■To prevent damage to USB memory
●Do not leave USB memory in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehi-
cle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.
●Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory
while it is connected as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal.
●Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the USB
memory or its terminal.
284
3-2. Using the audio system
Optimal use of the audio system
Displays the current mode
Changes the following set-
tings
• Sound quality and vol-
ume balance (P. 285)
The sound quality and bal-
ance setting can be
changed to produce the
best sound.
• Automatic Sound Level-
izer on/off (P. 286)
Selecting the mode
285
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Using the audio control function
■Changing sound quality modes
Press .
Turn to select “Sound Setting”.
Press .
Turn to select the desired mode.
“BASS”,“TREBLE”,“FADER”,“BALANCE”, or“ASL”
Press .
■Adjusting sound quality
Turning adjusts the level.
*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each audio mode.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
Mode
displayed
Sound
quality mode Level Turn to the
left
Turn to the
right
“BASS” Bass* -5 to 5 Low High
“TREBLE” Treble* -5 to 5
“FADER”
Front/rear
volume
balance
R7 to F7 Shifts to rear Shifts to front
“BALANCE”
Left/right
volume
balance
L7 to R7 Shifts to left Shifts to right
286
3-2. Using the audio system
■Adjusting the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)
When ASL is selected, turning to the right changes the
amount of ASL in the order of “LOW”, “MID” and “HIGH”.
Turning to the left turns ASL off.
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to vehi-
cle speed.
287
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Using the AUX port
■Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system
The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle’s audio controls. All other
adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.
■When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable
audio device.
This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen
to it through the vehicle’s speakers.
Open the cover and connect
the portable audio device.
Press until “AUX” is displayed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
288
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the steering wheel audio switches
Turning on the power
Press when the audio system is turned off.
Changing the audio source
Press when the audio system is turned on. The audio source
changes as follows each time is pressed. If a mode cannot be
used, it will be skipped.
AM
FM
CD mode
iPod or USB memory mode
Bluetooth
®
audio
AUX
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the
steering wheel.
Operation may differ and usage may not be possible with audio/nav-
igation systems that are not compatible with the steering switches in
this vehicle.
Volume
Radio mode: Select radio
stations
CD mode: Select tracks and
files (MP3 and WMA)
iPod mode: Selects a song
USB memory mode:
Selects a folder and file
Bluetooth® audio mode:
Selects an album and track
Power on, select audio
source
289
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Adjusting the volume
Press “+” on to increase the volume and “-” to decrease the vol-
ume.
Hold down “+” or “-” on to continue increasing or decreasing the vol-
ume.
Silencing a sound
Press and hold .
To cancel, press and hold again.
Selecting a radio station
Press to select the radio mode.
Press “” or “” on to select a preset station.
To scan for receivable stations, press and hold “” or “” on
until you hear a beep.
Selecting a track/file or song
Press to select CD, iPod, USB memory or Bluetooth®
audio mode.
Press “” or “” on to select the desired track/file or
song.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
290
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting a folder or album (MP3 and WMA, USB memory and
Bluetooth® audio)
Press to select CD, USB memory or Bluetooth® audio
mode.
Press and hold “” or “” on until you hear a beep.
CAUTION
■To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.
STEP
1
STEP
2
291
3
Interior features
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Bluetooth® audio/phone
■Bluetooth® audio
The Bluetooth® audio system enables you to enjoy music played
on a portable digital audio player (portable player) from the vehi-
cle speakers via wireless communication.
This audio system supports Bluetooth®, a wireless data system
capable of playing portable audio music without cables. If your
portable player does not support Bluetooth®, the Bluetooth®
audio system will not function.
■Bluetooth® phone (hands-free phone system)
This system supports Bluetooth®, which allows you to make or
receive calls without using cables to connect a cellular phone
and the system, and without operating the cellular phone.
292
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
■Conditions affecting operation
The Bluetooth® audio/phone may not operate normally in the following situa-
tions:
●The portable player does not support Bluetooth®
●The cellular phone is located outside the service area
●The Bluetooth® device is switched off
●The Bluetooth® device has a low battery
●The Bluetooth® device is not connected to the system
●The Bluetooth® device is behind the seat or in the glove box or console
box, or metal material covers or touches the device
■When transferring ownership of the vehicle
Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improp-
erly accessed. (P. 313)
■About Bluetooth®
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
293
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
3
Interior features
■Compatible models
●Bluetooth® specifications:
Ver. 1.1, or higher (recommended: Ver. 2.1 + EDR or higher)
●Following Profiles:
• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0, or higher (recom-
mended: Ver. 1.2 or higher)
• AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (rec-
ommended: Ver. 1.3 or higher)
Portable players must correspond to the above specifications in order to be
connected to the Bluetooth® audio system. However, please note that some
functions may be limited depending on the type of portable player.
●Cellular phone
• HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (recommended: Ver. 1.5)
• OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1
• PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Ver. 1.0
294
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
●Do not use a cellular phone.
●Do not connect Bluetooth® device or operate the controls.
■Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
●Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth® antennas. People with implantable
cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or
implantable cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable dis-
tance between themselves and the Bluetooth® antennas. The radio waves
may affect the operation of such devices.
●Before using Bluetooth® devices, users of any electrical medical device
other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization
therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should con-
sult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation
under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected
effects on the operation of such medical devices.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to Bluetooth® device
Do not leave Bluetooth® device in the vehicle. The temperature inside the
vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the device.
295
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
3
Interior features
Using the Bluetooth® audio/phone
■Audio unit
Bluetooth® connection con-
dition
If “BT” is not displayed, the
Bluetooth® audio/phone
cannot be used.
Display
A message, name, number,
etc. is displayed.
Lower-case characters and
special characters cannot
be displayed.
Displays the set up menu
Selects items such as menu
and number
Turn: Selects an item
Press: Inputs the selected
item
Off-hook switch
Turns the hands-free sys-
tem on/starts a call
On-hook switch
Turns the hands-free sys-
tem off/ends a call/refuses a
call
Displays information that is
too long to be displayed at
one time on the display
(press and hold)
Selects speed dials
297
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
3
Interior features
Using the Bluetooth® audio/phone for the first time
Before using the Bluetooth® audio/phone, it is necessary to register a
Bluetooth® device in the system. Follow the procedure below to reg-
ister (pair) a device:
Press and select “Bluetooth” using .
Press and select “Pairing” using .
A passkey will be displayed.
SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) incompatible Bluetooth®
devices: Input the passkey into the device.
SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth® devices:
Select “Yes” to register the device. Depending on the type of
device, it may register automatically.
If a Bluetooth® device has both music player and cellular phone func-
tions, both functions will be registered at the same time. When delet-
ing the device, both functions will be deleted at the same time.
If the off-hook switch is pressed and the “PHONE” mode is entered
when no phones have been registered, the registration screen will be
automatically displayed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
298
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Menu list of the Bluetooth® audio/phone
First menu Second menu Third menu Operation details
“Bluetooth”
“BT Pairing” - Registering a
Bluetooth® device
“List Phone” - Listing the registered
cellular phones
“List Audio” - Listing the registered
portable players
“Passkey” - Changing the passkey
“BT Power” -
Setting automatic
connection of the device
on or off
“Bluetooth info”
“Device Name”
“Device
Address”
Displaying the device
status
“Display Setting” -
Setting the automatic
connection confirmation
display to on or off
“Initialize” - Initializing the settings
299
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
3
Interior features
“Phone”
“Phonebook”
“Add contacts” Adding a new number
“Add SD” Registering a speed
dial
“Delete Call
History”
Deleting a number
stored in the call history
“Delete
contacts”
Deleting a number
stored in the
phonebook
“Delete other
PB”
Deleting a phonebook’s
data
“HF Sound
Setting”
“Call volume” Setting call volume
“Ringtone
volume” Setting ringtone volume
“Ringtone” Setting the ringtone
“Transfer
Histories” -Transferring the call
histories
■Bluetooth® audio/phone system functions
Depending on the Bluetooth® device, certain functions may not be available.
First menu Second menu Third menu Operation details
300
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Operating a Bluetooth
®
enabled portable player
Selecting an album
Press ( ) or ( ) to select the desired album.
Scanning an album
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
The first 10 seconds of the first track in the each album will be
played.
When the desired album is reached, press again.
Selecting tracks
Press “” or “” on to select the desired track.
Random playback
Repeat play
Playback
Playback/Pause Displays text message
VolumePower
Selecting a track
Selecting items
Selecting an album, fast-forwarding or reversing
Search playback
STEP
1
STEP
2
301
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
3
Interior features
Scanning tracks
Press .
The first 10 seconds of all tracks in the album will be played.
When the desired track is reached, press again.
Playing and pausing tracks
Press ( ) to play or pause a track.
Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold ( ) or
().
Random playback
Pressing (RDM) changes modes in the following order:
Album random All track random Off
Repeat play
Pressing (RPT) changes modes in the following order:
Track repeat Album repeat* Off
*: Available except when RDM (random playback) is selected
Switching the display
Press .
Track title and Artist name are displayed on the display.
To return to the previous display, press or (BACK).
STEP
1
STEP
2
302
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
■Bluetooth® audio system functions
Depending on the portable player that is connected to the system, certain
functions may not be available.
303
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
3
Interior features
Making a phone call
To enter the “PHONE” mode, press the off-hook switch.
■Making a phone call
●Dialing by selecting a name
●Speed dialing
●Dialing by entering the number
●Dialing from call histories
■Receiving a phone call
●Answering the phone
●Refusing the call
■Operations during a call
●Transferring a call
●Muting your voice
●Inputting digits
●Setting call volume
■Adjusting the ringtone volume when receiving a call
304
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Dialing by selecting a name
Select “Phonebook” using .
Select the desired name using and press the off-hook
switch.
By pressing (Add S. Dial) and then one of the speed dial but-
tons (from to ) while the desired name is selected, it
can be registered as a speed dial.
Speed dialing
Select “Speed dials” using .
Press the desired preset button (from to ) and
press the off-hook switch.
By pressing (Add S. Dial) and then one of the speed dial but-
tons (from to ) while the desired name is selected, it
can be registered as a speed dial.
Dialing by entering the number
Select “Dial by number” using .
Enter the phone number and press the off-hook switch.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
305
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
3
Interior features
Dialing from call histories
Select “All calls”, “Missed calls”, “Incoming calls” or “Outgoing
calls” using .
Select the desired number using and press the off-
hook switch.
The following operations can be performed:
●Registering a number as a speed dial
Press (Add S. Dial) and then press and hold the desired
preset button (from to ).
●Deleting the selected number
Press (DELETE) and press (YES).
When receiving a phone call
■Answering the phone
Press the off-hook switch.
■Refusing the call
Press the on-hook switch.
■Receiving a call when on another call
Press the off-hook switch.
Pressing the off-hook switch again returns you to the previous call.
STEP
1
STEP
2
306
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Operations during a call
●Transferring a call
A call can be transferred between the cellular phone and system
while dialing, receiving a call, or during a call. Use one of the fol-
lowing methods:
a. Operate the cellular phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the oper-
ation of the phone.
b. Press the * (PHONE).
*: This operation can be performed only when transferring a call from
the cellular phone to the system during a call.
●Muting your voice
Press (MUTE).
●Inputting digits
Press (0 - 9) and use to input the desired digits.
• To send the input digits press (SEND).
• When finished, press (EXIT) to return to the previous screen.
●Setting call volume
Change the call volume using .
To decrease the volume: Turn counterclockwise.
To increase the volume: Turn clockwise.
307
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
3
Interior features
Adjusting the ringtone volume when receiving a call
Change the ringtone volume using .
To decrease the volume: Turn counterclockwise.
To increase the volume: Turn clockwise.
■When talking on the phone
●Do not talk simultaneously with the other party.
●Keep the volume of the received voice down. Otherwise, voice echo will
increase.
■Automatic volume adjustment
When vehicle speed is 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the volume automatically
increases. The volume returns to the previous volume setting when vehicle
speed drops to 43 mph (70 km/h) or less.
■Phone call system functions
Depending on the cellular phone, certain functions may not be available.
■Situations where the system may not recognize your voice
●When driving on a rough road
●When driving at high speeds
●When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone
●When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise
308
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Using the “SET UP” menu (“Bluetooth” menu)
Registering a Bluetooth® device in the system allows the system to
function. The following functions can be used for registered devices:
■Functions and operation procedures
Press and select “Bluetooth” using .
Press and select one of the following functions
using .
●Registering a Bluetooth® device
“BT Pairing”
●Listing the registered cellular phones
“List Phone”
●Listing the registered portable players
“List Audio”
●Changing the passkey
“Passkey”
●Setting automatic connection of the device on or off
“BT Power”
●Displaying the device status
“Bluetooth info”
●Setting the automatic connection confirmation display to on or
off
“Display Setting”
●Initialization
“Initialize”
STEP
1
STEP
2
309
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
3
Interior features
Registering a portable player
Select “Pairing” using , and perform the procedure for register-
ing a portable player. (P. 297)
Listing the registered cellular phones
Select “List Phone” using . The list of registered cellular
phones will be displayed.
●Connecting the registered cellular phone to the audio system
Select the name of the cellular phone to be connected
using .
Select “Select” using .
●Deleting a registered cellular phone
Select the name of the cellular phone to be deleted using
.
Select “Delete” using .
Press (YES).
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
310
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Listing the registered portable players
Select “List Audio” using . The list of registered portable play-
ers will be displayed.
●Connecting the registered portable player to the audio system
Select the name of the portable player to be connected
using .
Select “Select” using .
●Deleting the registered portable player
Select the name of the portable player to be deleted using
.
Select “Delete” using .
Press (YES).
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
311
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
3
Interior features
Changing the passkey
Select “Passkey” using .
Select a 4 to 8-digit passkey using .
Input the number 1 digit at a time.
When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has
been input, press again.
If the passkey to be registered has 8 digits, pressing again is
not necessary.
Setting automatic connection of the device on or off
If “BT Power” is set to on, the registered device will be connected
automatically when the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” position.
Select “BT Power” using .
Select “ON” or “OFF” using .
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
312
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Displaying the device status
Select “Bluetooth info” using .
●Displaying the device name
Select “Device Name” using .
●Displaying the device address
Select “Device Address” using .
Setting the automatic connection confirmation display to on or off
If the “Display Setting” is set to on, the portable player connection sta-
tus will be displayed when the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or
“ON” position.
Select “Display Setting” using .
Select “ON” or “OFF” using .
STEP
1
STEP
2
313
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
3
Interior features
Initialization
Select “Initialize” using .
●Initializing the sound settings
Select “Sound setting” using and press (YES).
For details about sound settings: P. 314
●Initializing the device information
Select “Car Device Info” using and press (YES).
Automatic connection of a portable device, automatic connection confir-
mation display and the passkey will be initialized.
●Initializing all the settings
Select “All Initialize” using and press (YES).
■The number of Bluetooth® devices that can be registered
Up to 5 Bluetooth® devices can be registered in the system.
314
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Using the “SET UP” menu (“Phone” menu)
■Functions and operation procedures
To enter the menu of each function, press and follow the
steps below using :
●Adding a new phone number
1. “Phone” 2. “Phonebook” 3. “Add contacts”
●Setting speed dials
1. “Phone” 2. “Phonebook” 3. “Add SD”
●Deleting call histories
1. “Phone” 2. “Phonebook” 3. “Delete Call History”
●Deleting a registered phone number
1. “Phone” 2. “Phonebook” 3. “Delete contacts”
●Deleting another cellular phone’s phonebook
1. “Phone” 2. “Phonebook” 3. “Delete other PB”
●Setting call volume
1. “Phone” 2. “HF Sound Setting” 3. “Call Volume”
●Setting ringtone volume
1. “Phone” 2. “HF Sound Setting” 3. “Ringtone Volume”
●Setting ringtone
1. “Phone” 2. “HF Sound Setting” 3. “Ringtone”
●Transferring call histories
1. “Phone” 2. “Transfer Histories”
315
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
3
Interior features
Adding a new phone number
Select “Add contacts” using .
●Transferring all contacts from the cellular phone
Select “Overwrite all contacts” using and press
(YES).
●Transferring one contact from the cellular phone
Select “Add one contact” using and press (YES).
Setting speed dials
Select “Add SD” using .
Select the desired data using .
Press and hold the desired preset button (from to
).
For details about setting speed dials from the call history: P. 305
For details about deleting speed dials: P. 304
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
316
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Deleting call histories
Select “Delete Call History” using .
●Deleting outgoing call history
Select “Outgoing Calls” using .
Select the desired phone number using and press
(YES).
To delete all outgoing call history data, press (ALL) and
then press (YES).
●Deleting incoming call history
Select “Incoming calls” using .
Select the desired phone number using and press
(YES).
To delete all incoming call history data, press (ALL) and
then press (YES).
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
317
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
3
Interior features
●Deleting missed call history
Select “Missed Calls” using .
Select the desired phone number using and press
(YES).
To delete all missed call history data, press (ALL) and then
press (YES).
●Deleting a number from all call histories (Outgoing calls, Incoming
calls and Missed calls)
Select “All Calls” using .
Select the desired phone number using and press
(YES).
To delete all of the call histories data, press (ALL) and then
press (YES).
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
318
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Deleting a registered phone number
Select “Delete contacts” using .
Select the desired phone number using and press
(YES).
To delete all of the registered phone numbers, select “All delete”
using and press (YES).
Deleting another cellular phone’s phonebook
Select “Delete other PB” using .
Select the desired phonebook using and press
(YES).
Setting call volume
Select “Call Volume” using .
Change the call volume.
To decrease the volume: Turn counterclockwise.
To increase the volume: Turn clockwise.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
319
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
3
Interior features
Setting ringtone volume
Select “Ringtone Volume” using .
Change the ringtone volume.
To decrease the volume: Turn counterclockwise.
To increase the volume: Turn clockwise.
Setting ringtone
Select “Ringtone” using .
Using , select a ringtone (1 - 3). To set the selected
ringtone, press .
Transferring call histories
Select “Transfer Histories” using and press (YES).
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
320
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
■Phone number
Up to 1000 names can be stored.
■Call history
Up to 10 numbers can be stored in each of the outgoing, incoming and
missed call history memories.
■Limitation of number of digits
A phone number that exceeds 24 digits cannot be registered.
322
3-4. Using the interior lights
Interior lights/personal lights
Interior lights
Turns the lights off
Turns the lights on/off linked to
door positions
Turns the lights on
Personal lights
Turns the lights on
Turns the lights off
Interior lights/personal lights
323
3-4. Using the interior lights
3
Interior features
■Illuminated entry system
Vehicles without a smart key system
When the interior lights switch is in the “DOOR” position, the interior lights
automatically turn on/off according to the engine switch position, whether the
doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are open/closed.
Vehicles with a smart key system
When the interior lights switch is in the “DOOR” position, the interior lights
automatically turn on/off according to “POWER” switch mode, the presence
of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether
the doors are open/closed.
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Vehicles without a smart key system
If the interior lights, personal lights or luggage compartment light remain on
when the engine switch is “LOCK” position, the lights will go off automatically
after 20 minutes.
Vehicles with a smart key system
If the interior lights, personal lights or luggage compartment light remain on
when the “POWER” switch is off, the lights will go off automatically after 20
minutes.
■Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. the time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 522)
NOTICE
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is
off.
Interior lights/personal lights
324
3-5. Using the storage features
List of storage features
CAUTION
■Items that should not be left in the storage spaces
Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this
may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high:
●Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact
with other stored items.
●Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other
stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas,
causing a fire hazard.
Bottle holders
Auxiliary boxes (if equipped)
Glove box
Cup holders
Console box (if equipped)
325
3-5. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
Glove box
Pull up the lever to open the
glove box.
Console box (if equipped)
Lift the lid while pulling up the
knob to release the lock.
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Keep the glove box closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerv-
ing, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open
glove box or the items stored inside.
Glove box and console box
326
3-5. Using the storage features
Remove the lid at the bottom of
the console box.
Small items can be stored in this
space.
■When using the console box lid as an armrest
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Keep the console box closed. In the event of sudden braking, an accident
may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open console box or the
items stored inside.
The lid can be slid forward or backwards.
Console box
327
3-5. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
Auxiliary boxes
Type A
Type B
Type C
Auxiliary boxes
328
3-5. Using the storage features
Type D
Type E (if equipped)
CAUTION
■Items unsuitable for the box
Do not place items that easily roll over or extend past the box’s rim. The
items may be thrown out of the tray, causing an accident.
Auxiliary boxes
329
3-5. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
Cup holders
Front
Rear (type A)
Rear (type B)
Pull down the cup holder lid.
Cup holders
330
3-5. Using the storage features
Bottle holders
CAUTION
■Items unsuitable for the cup holder
Do not place anything other than cups or beverage cans in the cup holders.
Items in the cup holders may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an
accident or sudden braking, causing injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to
prevent burns.
■When not in use rear cup holder (type B)
Keep the cup holder closed. In the event of sudden braking, an accident may
occur due to an occupant being struck by the open cup holder.
■When using the bottle holder
●When storing a bottle, close the cap.
●The bottle may not be stored depending on its size or shape.
CAUTION
■Items unsuitable for the bottle holder
Do not place anything other than a bottle in the bottle holders.
Items in the bottle holders may be thrown out of the holders in the event of
an accident or sudden braking and cause injury.
Cup holders and bottle holders
331
3-5. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
NOTICE
■Items that should not be stowed in the bottle holders
Put the cap on before stowing a bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bot-
tle holders, or glasses and paper cups containing liquid. The contents may
spill and glasses may break.
Bottle holders
332
3-6. Other interior features
Sun visors
To set the visor in the for-
ward position, flip it down.
To set the visor in the side
position, flip down, unhook,
and swing it to the side.
333
3-6. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Vanity mirrors
Slide the cover to open.
334
3-6. Other interior features
Outside temperature display
■The outside temperature is displayed when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
■Outside temperature display
The temperature display shows temperatures within the range of
-40°F (-40°C) and 122°F (50°C).
The outside temperature dis-
play of the “Drive Information”
screen can be displayed by
pressing the “DISP” switch.
(P. 191)
The outside temperature is shown on the
multi-information display when the steer-
ing wheel climate remote control switches
are used to adjust the air conditioning
system’s temperature or change between
outside and recirculated air modes.
(P. 243)
335
3-6. Other interior features
3
Interior features
■Display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be dis-
played, or the display may take longer than normal to change:
●When the vehicle is stopped, or moving at low speeds (less than 16 mph
[25 km/h])
●When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/
exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)
■When “” or “E” is displayed
The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
336
3-6. Other interior features
Power outlet
■The power outlet can be used when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The “POWER” switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.
NOTICE
■To avoid damaging the power outlet
Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short cir-
cuit.
■To prevent blown fuse
Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the hybrid system
is off.
The power outlet can be used for 12 V accessories that run on less
than 10 A.
337
3-6. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Seat heaters
■The seat heaters can be used when
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
■When not in use
Turn the seat heater off. The indicator light goes off.
: If equipped
Turns on the front left seat
heater
Turns on the front right seat
heater
The indicator light comes on.
Push the switch once again to
turn off the seat heater.
338
3-6. Other interior features
CAUTION
■Burns
●Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat
heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:
• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically chal-
lenged
• Persons with sensitive skin
• Persons who are fatigued
• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping
drugs, cold remedies, etc.)
●Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature
of the seat and may lead to overheating.
●Do not use the seat heater more than necessary. Doing so may cause
minor burns or overheating.
NOTICE
■To prevent seat heater damage
Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do
not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Turn the seat heaters off when the hybrid system is off, and check that the
indicator is off.
339
3-6. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Coat hooks
CAUTION
■Items that cannot be hung on the coat hook
Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or sharp objects on the hook. If the
SRS curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles,
causing death or serious injury.
: If equipped
340
3-6. Other interior features
Assist grips
CAUTION
■Assist grip
Do not use the assist grip when getting in or out of the vehicle or rising from
your seat.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the assist grip
Do not hang any heavy object or put a heavy load on the assist grip.
An assist grip installed on the ceiling can be used to support your
body while sitting on the seat.
Front
Rear (if equipped)
341
3-6. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Floor mat
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same
model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place
onto the carpet.
Insert the retaining hooks
(clips) into the floor mat eye-
lets.
Turn the upper knob of each
retaining hook (clip) to secure
the floor mats in place.
*: Always align the marks.
The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the
illustration.
STEP
1
*
STEP
2
342
3-6. Other interior features
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver's floor mat to slip, possibly interfering
with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may
become difficult to stop the vehicle, leading to a serious accident.
■When installing the driver's floor mat
●Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year
vehicles, even if they are Toyota Genuine floor mats.
●Only use floor mats designed for the driver's seat.
●Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) pro-
vided.
●Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
●Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.
■Before driving
●Check that the floor mat is securely
fixed in the correct place with all the
provided retaining hooks (clips). Be
especially careful to perform this check
after cleaning the floor.
●With the hybrid system stopped and the
shift lever in P, fully depress each pedal
to the floor to make sure it does not
interfere with the floor mat.
343
3-6. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Luggage cover
: If equipped
■Removing the luggage cover
Unhook the cords.
Push the luggage cover for-
ward to disengage the
anchors.
Remove the luggage cover.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
344
3-6. Other interior features
■Installing the luggage cover
Place the luggage cover on
the anchors.
Push the luggage cover until a
click sound is heard.
Hook the cords.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
Maintenance and care 4
345
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior......... 346
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior.......... 349
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements.................. 352
General maintenance....... 355
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs........................ 359
4-3. Do-it-yourself
maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions .................... 360
Hood ................................ 364
Positioning a floor jack..... 366
Engine compartment........ 368
12-volt battery .................. 379
Tires................................. 384
Tire inflation pressure ...... 392
Wheels............................. 396
Air conditioning filter......... 399
Wireless remote control/
electronic key battery..... 401
Checking and replacing
fuses .............................. 404
Light bulbs........................ 415
346
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
■Automatic car washes
●Fold the mirrors and remove the antenna before washing the vehicle.
Start washing from the front of the vehicle. Make sure to re-install the
antenna and extend the mirrors before driving.
●Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface
and harm your vehicle’s paint.
●In certain automatic car washes, the rear spoiler may interfere with
machine operation. This may prevent the vehicle from being cleaned
properly or result in damage to the rear spoiler.
■High pressure car washes
●Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity
of the windows.
●Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle
is closed properly.
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime
condition:
●Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle
body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any
dirt and dust.
●Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a
chamois.
●For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thor-
oughly with water.
●Wipe away any water.
●Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehi-
cle body is cool.
347
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
■When using a car wash (vehicles with a smart key system)
If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effec-
tive range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the
following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:
●Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the
vehicle. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
●Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart key
system. (P. 53)
■Aluminum wheels (if equipped)
●Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use
hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical
cleaners.
Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
●Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after
driving for long distance in the hot weather.
●Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.
■Bumpers
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
CAUTION
■When washing the vehicle
Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may
cause the electrical components etc. to catch fire.
■Precautions regarding the exhaust pipe
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled
sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.
348
4-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and compo-
nents (aluminum wheels etc.)
●Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
• After driving near the sea coast
• After driving on salted roads
• If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface
• If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the
paint surface
• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust,
iron powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
●If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
●To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place
with low humidity when storing the wheels.
■Cleaning the exterior lights
●Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
●Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
■To prevent damage to the antenna
Remove the antenna in the following situations:
●When the antenna will touch the ceiling of a garage or other such places
●When a car cover is to be used to cover the vehicle
■Antenna installation and removal precautions
●Before driving, ensure that the antenna is installed.
●When the antenna is removed, such as before entering an automatic car
wash, make sure to store it in a suitable place so as not to lose it. Also,
before driving, make sure to reinstall the antenna in its original position.
349
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
■Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a
sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use
water. Wipe dirty surfaces and let them dry. Excellent results are obtained by
keeping the carpet as dry as possible.
■Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also
check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and
keep it in top condition:
■Protecting the vehicle interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty sur-
faces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
■Cleaning the synthetic leather areas
●Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.
●Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a
sponge or soft cloth.
●Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the
dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.
350
4-1. Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■Water in the vehicle
●Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle, such as on the floor, in the
hybrid battery (traction battery) air vents, and in the luggage compartment.
Doing so may cause the hybrid battery, electrical components, etc. to mal-
function or catch fire.
●Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(P. 118)
An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function
properly, resulting in death or serious injury.
■Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off
the windshield, obstructing the driver's view and leading to an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
351
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■Cleaning detergents
●Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehi-
cle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:
• Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline,
alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, and bleach
• Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alco-
hol
●Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel's or other
interior part’s painted surface may be damaged.
■Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes
into contact with electrical components such as the audio system above or
under the floor of the vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.
■Cleaning the inside of the rear window
●Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause
damage to the rear window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened
with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in
strokes running parallel to the heater wires.
●Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires.
352
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
■Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine Toyota parts be used for repairs to ensure
performance of each system. If non-Toyota parts are used in replacement or
if a repair shop other than a Toyota dealer performs repairs, confirm the war-
ranty coverage.
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular
maintenance are essential. It is the owner's responsibility to perform
regular checks. Toyota recommends the following maintenance:
■General maintenance
General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis.
This can be done by yourself or by a Toyota dealer.
■Scheduled maintenance
Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified inter-
vals according to the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
■Do-it-yourself maintenance
You can perform some maintenance procedures by yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect war-
ranty coverage.
The use of Toyota Repair Manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Owner’s War-
ranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
353
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Reset the maintenance data (U.S.A. only)
After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance
schedule, please reset the maintenance data.
To reset the data, follow the procedures described below:
Vehicles without a smart key system
Switch the display to the odometer (P. 190) and then turn the
engine switch off.
Vehicles with a smart key system
Switch the display to the odometer (P. 190) and then turn the
“POWER” switch off.
Vehicles without a smart key system
Turn the engine switch to the “ON” position. The multi-information
display's initial screen will be displayed for a few seconds. While the
initial screen is being displayed, press the “TRIP” steering switch
(P. 188) 3 times, pressing and holding the switch on the third
time.
Vehicles with a smart key system
Turn the “POWER” switch to ON mode. The multi-information dis-
play's initial screen will be displayed for a few seconds. While the
initial screen is being displayed, press the “TRIP” steering switch
(P. 188) 3 times, pressing and holding the switch on the third
time.
Continue to press and hold the button until the trip meter displays
“000000”.
■Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Toyota dealer
●Toyota technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date
with the latest service information. They are well informed about the
operations of all systems on your vehicle.
●Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has
been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise
while your vehicle is under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly
take care of it.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
354
4-2. Maintenance
CAUTION
■If your vehicle is not properly maintained
Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and
possible serious injury or death.
■Handling of the 12-volt battery
●Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile
components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a
well ventilated area.
●Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by
component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately.
●12-volt battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your
hands after handling. (P. 379)
355
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
General maintenance
Engine compartment
Items Check points
Brake fluid Is the brake fluid at the correct
level? (P. 375)
Coolant
Is the engine/power control unit
coolant at the correct level?
(P. 373)
Engine oil Is the engine oil at the correct
level? (P. 369)
Exhaust system There should not be any fumes or
strange sounds.
Radiator/condenser
The radiator and condenser
should be free from foreign
objects. (P. 375)
Washer fluid Is there sufficient washer fluid?
(P. 378)
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be per-
formed at the intervals specified in the “Owner's Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled
Maintenance Guide”. It is recommended that any problem you notice
should be brought to the attention of your Toyota dealer or qualified
service shop for advice.
356
4-2. Maintenance
Vehicle interior
Items Check points
12-volt battery Check the connections. (P. 379)
Accelerator pedal
• The accelerator pedal should
move smoothly (without uneven
pedal effort or catching).
Brake pedal
• Does the brake pedal move
smoothly?
• Does the brake pedal have appro-
priate clearance from the floor?
(P. 503)
• Does the brake pedal have the
correct amount of free play?
(P. 503)
Brakes
• The vehicle should not pull to one
side when the brakes are applied.
• The brakes should work effec-
tively.
• The brake pedal should not feel
spongy.
• The brake pedal should not get
too close to the floor when the
brakes are applied.
Head restraints
(Adjustable type)
• Do the head restraints move
smoothly and lock securely?
Hybrid transmission “Park” mech-
anism
• When parked on a slope and the
parking brake is on, is the vehicle
securely stopped?
Indicators/buzzers • Do the indicators and buzzers
function properly?
Lights • Do all the lights come on?
357
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Parking brake
• Does the parking brake lever
operate normally?
• When parked on a slope and the
parking brake is on, is the vehicle
securely stopped?
Seat belts
• Do the seat belts operate
smoothly?
• The seat belts should not be dam-
aged.
Seats • Do the seat controls operate
properly?
Steering wheel
• Does the steering wheel rotate
smoothly?
• Does the steering wheel have the
correct amount of free play?
• There should not be any strange
sounds coming from the steering
wheel.
Items Check points
358
4-2. Maintenance
Vehicle exterior
Items Check points
Doors • Do the doors operate smoothly?
Engine hood • Does the engine hood lock sys-
tem work properly?
Fluid leaks
• There should not be any signs of
fluid leakage after the vehicle has
been parked.
Tires
• Is the tire inflation pressure cor-
rect?
• The tires should not be dam-
aged or excessively worn.
• Have the tires been rotated
according to the maintenance
schedule?
• The wheel nuts should not be
loose.
Windshield wipers/rear window
wiper (if equipped)
• The wiper blades should not
show any signs of cracking,
splitting, wear, contamination or
deformation.
• The wiper blades should clear
the windshield/rear window
without streaking or skipping.
CAUTION
■If the hybrid system is operating
Turn the hybrid system off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation
before performing maintenance checks.
359
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which
include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system moni-
tors the operation of the emission control system.
■If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere
in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/
M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer
to service the vehicle.
■Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the following situa-
tions:
●When the 12-volt battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are
erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes
may not be completely set.
●When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a tempo-
rary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
■When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after
several driving trips
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the
vehicle is driven 40 or more times.
■If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
Contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
360
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct
procedure as given in these sections.
Items Parts and tools
12-volt battery condition(P. 379)
• Grease
• Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)
Brake fluid level (P. 375)
• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE
J1703 brake fluid
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding
brake fluid)
Engine/power control unit coolant
level (P. 373)
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or a similar high quality ethylene
glycol based non-silicate,
non-amine, non-nitrite and
non-borate coolant with long-life
hybrid organic acid technology
For the U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50%
coolant and 50% deionized
water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is pre-mixed with 55%
coolant and 45% deionized
water.
• Funnel (used only for adding
coolant)
361
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Items Parts and tools
Engine oil level (P. 369)
• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or
equivalent
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding
engine oil)
Fuses (P. 404) • Fuse with same amperage rating
as original
Light bulbs (P. 415)
• Bulb with same number and watt-
age rating as original
• Phillips-head screwdriver
• Flathead screwdriver
• Wrench
Radiator and condenser
(P. 375)
Tire inflation pressure (P. 392) • Tire pressure gauge
• Compressed air source
Washer fluid (P. 378)
• Water or washer fluid containing
antifreeze (for winter use)
• Funnel (used only for adding
water or washer fluid)
362
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may
move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death
or serious injury, observe the following precautions:
■When working on the engine compartment
●Vehicles without a smart key system: Make sure that the engine switch is
in the “LOCK” position and the “READY” indicator is off.
Vehicles with a smart key system: Make sure that the indicator on the
“POWER” switch and the “READY” indicator are both off.
●Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan and engine
drive belt.
●Be careful not to touch the engine, power control unit, radiator, exhaust
manifold, etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids
may also be hot.
●Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the
engine compartment.
●Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel. Fuel fumes
are flammable.
■When working near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille
Vehicles without a smart key system: The electric cooling fan may keep
rotating for about 3 minutes even after the engine switch is turned to the
“LOCK” position.
With the engine switch in the “ON” position, the electric cooling fan may
automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant tem-
perature is high. Be sure the engine switch is in the “LOCK” position when
working near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille.
Vehicles with a smart key system: The electric cooling fan may keep rotating
for about 3 minutes even after the “POWER” switch is off.
With the “POWER” switch in ON mode, the electric cooling fan may automat-
ically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature
is high. Be sure the “POWER” switch is off when working near the electric
cooling fan or radiator grille.
363
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from
getting in your eyes.
NOTICE
■If you remove the air cleaner filter
Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear
due to dirt in the air.
364
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Hood
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
Pull the hood lock release
lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Pull up the auxiliary catch
lever and lift the hood.
Hold the hood open by insert-
ing the supporting rod into the
slot.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
365
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion
and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
■After installing the support rod into the slot
Make sure the rod supports the hood securely from falling down on to your
head or body.
NOTICE
■When closing the hood
Be sure to return the support rod to its clip before closing the hood. Closing
the hood with the support rod up could cause the hood to bend.
366
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Positioning a floor jack
When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack cor-
rectly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.
Front
Rear
367
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■When raising your vehicle
Make sure to observe the following precautions to reduce the possibility of
death or serious injury:
●When using a floor jack, follow the instructions of the manual provided with
the jack.
●Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle.
●Do not put any part of your body underneath the vehicle when it is sup-
ported only by the floor jack.
●Always use floor jack and/or automotive jack stands on a solid, flat, level
surface.
●Do not start the hybrid system while the vehicle is supported by the floor
jack.
●Stop the vehicle on level, firm ground, set the parking brake and shift the
shift lever to P.
●Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point.
Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage
the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack.
●Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.
●When raising the vehicle, do not place any object on top of or underneath
the floor jack.
●Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack
such as the one shown in the illustra-
tion.
368
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment
Fuse boxes (P. 404)
Engine oil filler cap
(P. 370)
Engine coolant radiator cap
Power control unit
coolant reservoir (P. 373)
Brake fluid reservoir
(P. 375)
Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 373)
Engine/power control unit
coolant radiator (P. 375)
Electric cooling fan
Condenser (P. 375)
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 369)
Washer fluid tank (P. 378)
369
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
■Checking the engine oil
Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine
and turning off the hybrid system, wait more than 5 minutes
for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.
Holding a rag under the end, pull
the dipstick out.
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check
the oil level.
Low
Normal
Excessive
The shape of the dipstick may
differ depending on the type of
vehicle or engine.
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
Measuring side
STEP
6
370
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near
the low level mark, add engine
oil of the same type as that
already in the engine.
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before
adding oil.
Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.
Engine oil selection P. 499
Oil quantity
(Low Full) 1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp. qt.)
Item Clean funnel
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
371
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Engine oil consumption
A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the follow-
ing situations, oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be
refilled in between oil maintenance intervals.
●When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle
or after replacing the engine
●If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used
●When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, or when driving
while accelerating or decelerating frequently
●When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently
through heavy traffic
CAUTION
■Used engine oil
●Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may
cause skin disorders such as inflammation and skin cancer, so care
should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used
engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.
●Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do
not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the
ground. Call your Toyota dealer, service station or auto parts store for
information concerning recycling or disposal.
●Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
372
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on a regular basis.
■When replacing the engine oil
●Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
●Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
●Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
●Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
373
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Coolant
Engine coolant reservoir
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW”
lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.
Reservoir cap
“FULL” line
“LOW” line
If the level is on or below the
“LOW” line, add coolant up to the
“FULL” line. (P. 487)
Power control unit coolant reservoir
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F” and “L” lines on
the reservoir when the hybrid system is cold.
Reservoir cap
“F” line
“L” line
If the level is on or below the “L”
line, add coolant up to the “F” line.
(P. 487)
374
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene
glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant
with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.
U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant
and 50% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -31F [-35C])
Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant
and 45% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -44F [-42C])
For more details about coolant, contact your Toyota dealer.
■If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing
Visually check the radiators, hoses, engine/power control unit coolant reser-
voir caps, drain cock and water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Toyota dealer test the cap and check for
leaks in the cooling systems.
CAUTION
■When the hybrid system is hot
Do not remove the engine coolant radiator cap and power control unit cool-
ant reservoir cap.
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the
cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.
NOTICE
■When adding coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of
water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion
protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.
375
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Radiator and condenser
Check the radiator and condenser and clear away any foreign
objects.
If either of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of
their condition, have your vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
Brake fluid
■Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be
between the “MAX” and “MIN”
lines on the tank.
CAUTION
■When the hybrid system is hot
Do not touch the radiators or condenser as they may be hot and cause seri-
ous injuries, such as burns.
376
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Adding fluid
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item.
Slide and lift up the rubber strip
and clips to partly remove it as
shown.
Disconnect the claws and
remove the service cover.
Remove the reservoir cap.
Add brake fluid slowly while checking the fluid level.
Fluid type FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
Item Clean funnel
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
377
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking
efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.
CAUTION
■When filling the reservoir
Take care as brake fluid can harm your hands and eyes and damage painted
surfaces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean
water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
NOTICE
■If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads
wear out or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, there may be a serious problem.
378
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Washer fluid
If the amount of washer fluid is
insufficient, add washer fluid.
CAUTION
■When adding washer fluid
Add washer fluid after the hybrid system has been stopped and cooled down
sufficiently. Washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled inside
a hot engine compartment.
NOTICE
■Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.
■Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bot-
tle.
379
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
12-volt battery
■Location
The 12-volt battery is located
under the rear right seat.
■Removing the 12-volt battery cover
Push in the center part of
the clips
Remove the clips
Disengage the 3 clips and 3
guides on the back of the
cover and remove the 12-volt
battery cover.
Guides
Clips
STEP
1
STEP
2
380
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Exterior
Make sure that the 12-volt battery terminals are not corroded
and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose
clamps.
Terminals
Hold-down clamp
■Installing the 12-volt battery cover
Install the 12-volt battery
cover.
Guides
Clips
Check if the clips and guides
on the back of the cover are
engaging properly if the cover
cannot be installed.
Push out the center part of
the clips
Insert the clips
Push in the center part of
the clips
STEP
1
STEP
2
381
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Before recharging
When recharging, the 12-volt battery produces hydrogen gas which is flam-
mable and explosive. Therefore, observe the following precautions before
recharging:
●If recharging with the 12-volt battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to
disconnect the ground cable.
●Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and
disconnecting the charger cables to the 12-volt battery.
■When disconnecting the 12-volt battery terminals
Always disconnect the negative (-) terminal first.
■After recharging/reconnecting the 12-volt battery (vehicles with a
smart key system)
●Unlocking the doors using the smart key system may not be possible
immediately after reconnecting the 12-volt battery. If this happens, use
the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the
doors.
●Start the hybrid system with the “POWER” switch in ACCESSORY mode.
The hybrid system may not start with the “POWER” switch turned off.
However, the hybrid system will operate normally from the second
attempt.
●The “POWER” switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the 12-volt bat-
tery is reconnected, the vehicle will return the “POWER” switch mode to
the status it was in before the 12-volt battery was disconnected. Make
sure to turn off the power before disconnect the 12-volt battery. Take
extra care when connecting the 12-volt battery if the “POWER” switch
mode prior to discharge is unknown.
If the system will not start even after multiple attempts, contact your Toyota
dealer.
382
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■Chemicals in the 12-volt battery
The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may
produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk
of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or
near the 12-volt battery:
●Do not cause sparks by touching the 12-volt battery terminals with tools.
●Do not smoke or light a match near the 12-volt battery.
●Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
●Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
●Wear protective safety glasses when working near the 12-volt battery.
●Keep children away from the 12-volt battery.
■Where to safely charge the 12-volt battery
Always charge the 12-volt battery in an open area. Do not charge the 12-volt
battery in a garage or closed room where there is insufficient ventilation.
■When disconnecting the 12-volt battery terminals
Always disconnect the negative (-) terminal first. If the positive (+) terminal is
disconnected first and touches a surrounding metal surface it may cause
sparks resulting in a fire or it may result in an electric shock, death or serious
injury.
■How to recharge the 12-volt battery
Only perform a slow charge (3.5 A or less). The 12-volt battery may explode
if charged at a quicker rate.
383
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
●If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immedi-
ate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or
cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.
●If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical
attention immediately.
●If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the cloth-
ing and follow the procedure above if necessary.
●If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention
immediately.
■When replacing the 12-volt battery
Use a 12-volt battery designed for this vehicle. Failure to do so may cause
gas (hydrogen) to enter the passenger compartment, causing a fire or explo-
sion.
For replacement of the 12-volt battery, contact your Toyota dealer.
NOTICE
■When recharging the 12-volt battery
Never recharge the 12-volt battery while the hybrid system is operating.
Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.
384
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance sched-
ules and treadwear.
■Checking tires
New tread
Treadwear indicator
Worn tread
The location of treadwear
indicators is shown by the
“TWI” or “” marks, etc.,
molded on the sidewall of
each tire.
Check spare tire condition
and pressure if not rotated.
■Tire rotation
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
To equalize tire wear and
extend tire life, Toyota recom-
mends that tire rotation is
carried out at the same inter-
val as tire inspection.
Do not fail to initialize the tire
pressure warning system
after tire rotation.
■Tire pressure warning system
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure warning system
that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect
low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise.
(P. 439)
Front
385
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are
installed, new ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warn-
ing computer and the tire pressure warning system must be initial-
ized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes
registered by your Toyota dealer. (P. 386)
■The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the fol-
lowing circumstances:
●When rotating front and rear tires which have different tire infla-
tion pressures
●When changing the tire size
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current
tire inflation pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.
■How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the engine switch
(vehicles without a smart key system) or the “POWER” switch
(vehicles with a smart key system) off.
Initialization cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving.
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire infla-
tion pressure level. (P. 504)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire
inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will
operate based on this pressure level.
STEP
1
STEP
2
386
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Turn the engine switch to the “ON” position (vehicles without a
smart key system) or “POWER” switch to ON mode (vehicles
with a smart key system).
Press and hold the tire pressure
warning reset switch until the tire
pressure warning light blinks
slowly 3 times.
Vehicles without a smart key system: Wait for a few minutes
with the engine switch in the “ON” position and then turn the
engine switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system: Wait for a few minutes with
the “POWER” switch in ON mode and then turn the “POWER”
switch off.
Registering ID codes
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a
unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code. Have the ID code
registered by your Toyota dealer.
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
4
■When to replace your vehicle’s tires
Tires should be replaced if:
●You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to
expose the fabric, and bulges indicating internal damage
●A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the
size or location of a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.
STEP
5
387
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Replacing tires and wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not
registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After
driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1
minute and stays on to indicate a system malfunction.
■Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even
if it has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■Routine tire inflation pressure checks
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation
pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of
your routine of daily vehicle checks.
■Low profile tires (vehicles with P195/50R16 tires)
Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip perfor-
mance will be reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to
standard tires. Be sure to use snow tires or tire chains on snowy and/or
icy roads and drive carefully at a speed appropriate for road and weather
conditions.
■Maximum load of tire
Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2
of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the
rear axle, whichever is greater.
For the GAWR, see the Certification
Label. For the maximum load of the
tire, see the load limit at maximum cold
tire inflation pressure mentioned on the
sidewall of the tire. (P. 509)
388
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Tire types
●Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway
driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same
traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for
driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered
roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When
installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
●All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to
be adequate for driving in most winter conditions as well as for use
year-round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction
performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also,
all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance
compared with summer tires in highway driving.
●Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using
snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, con-
struction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your
vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow
tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without
first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires
should be installed on all wheels. (P. 231)
■Initializing the tire pressure warning system
Initialize the system with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the speci-
fied level.
■If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)
The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.
■If you press the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally
If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the speci-
fied level and initialize the tire pressure warning system again.
389
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has
failed
Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the follow-
ing cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will not
operate properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure
settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
●When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pres-
sure warning light does not blink 3 times.
●After driving for a certain period of time since the initialization has
been completed, the warning light comes on after blinking for 1
minute.
■Tire pressure warning system certification
U.S.A.
FCC ID: PAXPMVC010
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsi-
ble for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equip-
ment.
Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may
not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
390
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train as well as
dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
●Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.
Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.
●Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.
●Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply
tires).
●Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.
●Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.
Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.
●Do not tow if your vehicle has a compact spare tire installed.
■When initializing the tire pressure warning system
Do not operate the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjust-
ing the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire
pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure
is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually nor-
mal.
391
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves,
transmitters and tire valve caps
●When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pres-
sure warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled
correctly.
●When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than
those specified. The cap may become stuck.
■To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is
used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon
as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 385)
■Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or pot-
holes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing
the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may
cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels
and body.
■Low profile tires (vehicles with P195/50R16 tires)
Low profile tires may cause greater damage than usual to the tire wheel
when sustaining impact from the road surface. Therefore, pay attention
to the following:
●Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated,
they may be damaged more severely.
●Avoid potholes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards. Fail-
ure to do so may lead to severe tire and wheel damage.
■If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
393
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Inspection and adjustment procedure
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge
Remove the tire valve cap.
Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
Read the pressure using the gauge gradations.
If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended
level, adjust the pressure.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to
deflate.
After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement
and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check
for leakage.
Put the tire valve cap back on.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
394
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Tire inflation pressure check interval
You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least
once a month.
Do not forget to check the spare.
■Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
●Reduced fuel efficiency
●Reduced driving comfort and tire life
●Reduced safety
●Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.
■Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
●Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been
driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold
tire inflation pressure reading.
●Always use a tire pressure gauge.
The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire infla-
tion pressure that is even just a few pounds off can affect ride quality
and handling.
●Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for tire
inflation pressure to be higher after driving.
●Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle
is balanced.
395
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions
may occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury:
●Excessive wear
●Uneven wear
●Poor handling
●Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
●Poor sealing of the tire bead
●Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
●A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards
NOTICE
■When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.
Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and
cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps are lost,
replace them as soon as possible.
396
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be
replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or
cause a loss of handling control.
■Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that
they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter,
rim width and inset*.
Replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer.
*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.
Toyota does not recommend using the following:
●Wheels of different sizes or types
●Used wheels
●Bent wheels that have been straightened
■Aluminum wheel precautions (if equipped)
●Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use
with your aluminum wheels.
●When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the
wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
●Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using
tire chains.
●Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and
use a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.
397
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■When replacing wheels
The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to
provide advance warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure.
Whenever wheels are replaced, tire pressure warning valves and trans-
mitters must be installed. (P. 385)
CAUTION
■When replacing wheels
●Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in
the Owner’s Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control.
●Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a
tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or seri-
ous injury.
■When installing the wheel nuts
●Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened,
leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can
cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing an
accident and resulting in death or serious injury. Remove any oil or
grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
●Be sure to install the wheel nuts with
the tapered ends facing inward.
Installing the nuts with the tapered
ends facing outward can cause the
wheel to break and eventually cause
the wheel to come off while driving,
which could lead to an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
Tapered
portion
398
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
●Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warn-
ing valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your
Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to
purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your
Toyota dealer.
●Ensure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly
with non-genuine wheels.
399
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air
conditioning efficiency.
■Replacement method
Vehicles without a smart key system
Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
Turn the “POWER” switch off.
Open the glove box. Slide off
the damper.
Push in each side of the glove
box to disconnect the upper
claws.
Pull out the glove box and dis-
connect the lower claws.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
400
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Checking interval
Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance
schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, more frequent
cleaning or early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance
information, please refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement”.)
■If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
NOTICE
■When using the air conditioning system
Make sure that a filter is always installed.
Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the
system.
Remove the filter cover.
Remove the air conditioning
filter and replace it with a new
one.
The“UP” mark shown on the
filter should be pointing up.
STEP
5
STEP
6
401
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Wireless remote control/electronic key battery
Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.
■You will need the following items:
●Flathead screwdriver
●Small flathead screwdriver
●Lithium battery CR2016 (vehicles without a smart key sys-
tem), or CR2032 (vehicles with a smart key system)
■Replacing the battery (vehicles without a smart key system)
Remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the key,
cover the tip of the screwdriver
with a rag.
Remove the module.
Open the case cover using a
coin protected with tape etc.
and remove the depleted bat-
tery using a small flathead
screwdriver.
Insert a new battery with the
“+” terminal facing up.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
402
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Replacing the battery (vehicles with a smart key system)
Take out the mechanical key.
Remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the key,
cover the tip of the screwdriver
with a rag.
Remove the depleted battery
using a small flathead screw-
driver.
Insert a new battery with the
“+” terminal facing up.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
403
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Use a CR2016 (vehicles without a smart key system) or CR2032 (vehi-
cles with a smart key system) lithium battery
●Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, local electrical appli-
ance shops or camera stores.
●Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer.
●Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.
■If the key battery is depleted
The following symptoms may occur:
●The smart key system and wireless remote control will not function prop-
erly.
●The operational range will be reduced.
CAUTION
■Removed battery and other parts
These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking.
Keep away from children. Failure to do so could result in death or serious
injury.
NOTICE
■For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:
●Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
●Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control.
●Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
404
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have
blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
Vehicles without a smart key system
Turn the engine switch off.
Vehicles with a smart key system
Turn the “POWER” switch off.
Open the fuse box cover.
Engine compartment (type A fuse box)
Push the tab in and lift the
cover off.
Engine compartment (type B fuse box)
Push the tab in and lift the
cover off.
STEP
1
STEP
2
405
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Under the instrument panel
Remove the cover.
After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage rat-
ings” (P. 408) for details about which fuse to check.
Remove the fuse with the pull-out tool.
Only type A fuse can be
removed using the pullout
tool.
STEP
3
STEP
4
406
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Check if the fuse is blown.
Type A
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace the blown fuse with a
new fuse of an appropriate
amperage rating. The amper-
age rating can be found on the
fuse box lid.
Type B
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace the blown fuse with a
new fuse of an appropriate
amperage rating. The amper-
age rating can be found on the
fuse box lid.
Type C
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace the blown fuse with a
new fuse of an appropriate
amperage rating. The amper-
age rating can be found on the
fuse box lid.
STEP
5
407
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Type D
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace the blown fuse with a
new fuse of an appropriate
amperage rating. The amper-
age rating can be found on the
fuse box lid.
Type E
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact your Toyota dealer.
408
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse layout and amperage ratings
Engine compartment (type A fuse box)
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1 EFI-MAIN 20 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, EFI NO.2
2 HORN 10 A Horn
3 IG2 30 A IG2 NO.2, METER, IGN
4 SPARE 7.5 A Spare fuse
5 SPARE 15 A Spare fuse
6 SPARE 30 A Spare fuse
7 EFI NO.2 10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
8 H-LP RH-LO 10 A Right-hand headlight (low beam)
9 H-LP LH-LO 10 A Left-hand headlight (low beam),
gauge and meters
10 H-LP RH-HI 10 A Right-hand headlight (high beam)
11 H-LP LH-HI 10 A Left-hand headlight (high beam),
gauge and meters
409
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
12 IG2 NO.2 10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, steering switches, brake
system, starter system, smart key
system, occupant classification
system, SRS airbag system
13 DOME 15 A
Audio system, vehicle control and
operation data recording, main
body ECU, personal lights, lug-
gage compartment light
14 ECU-B NO.1 7.5 A Main body ECU, smart key system
15 METER 7.5 A Gauge and meters
16 IGN 15 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
17 HAZ 10 A Emergency flashers
18 ETCS 10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
19 ABS NO.1 20 A Brake system
20 ENG W/PMP 30 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
21 H-LP-MAIN 40 A
H-LP LH-LO, H-LP RH-LO, H-LP
LH-HI, H-LP RH-HI, daytime run-
ning light system
22 H-LP CLN 30 A No circuit
23 ABS MTR NO.1 30 A Brake system
24 P/I 50 A EFI-MAIN, HORN, IG2
Fuse Ampere Circuit
410
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
25 ECU-B NO.2 7.5 A
Air conditioning system, gauge
and meters, occupant classifica-
tion system, tire pressure warning
system, starter system, smart key
system, power door lock system
26 AM2 7.5 A Starter system
27 STRG LOCK 20 A Starter system
28 ABS NO.2 10 A Brake system
29 IGCT-MAIN 30 A IGCT NO.2, IGCT NO.3, IGCT
NO.4, PCU, BATT FAN
30 D/C CUT 30 A DOME, ECU-B NO.1
31 PTC HTR NO.1 30 A PTC heater
32 PTC HTR NO.2 30 A PTC heater
33 FAN 30 A Electric cooling fan
34 PTC HTR NO.3 30 A PTC heater
35 DEF 30 A MIR HTR, rear window defogger
36 DEICER 20 A No circuit
37 BATT FAN 10 A Battery cooling fan
38 IGCT NO.2 10 A Hybrid system
39 IGCT NO.4 10 A Hybrid system
40 PCU 10 A Hybrid system
41 IGCT NO.3 10 A Hybrid system
42 MIR HTR 10 A Outside rear view mirror defoggers
Fuse Ampere Circuit
411
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Engine compartment (type B fuse box)
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1 DC/DC 100 A Hybrid system
2 ABS MTR NO.2 30 A Brake system
3 HTR 40 A Air conditioning system
4 EPS 50 A Electric power steering system
412
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Under the driver’s side instrument panel
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1 TAIL 10 A
Parking lights, side marker lights,
tail lights, license plate lights, front
fog lights, gauge and meters
2 PANEL 5 A Instrument panel lights
3 DOOR R/R 20 A Rear power window (right side)
4 DOOR P 20 A Front power window (right side)
5 ECU-IG NO.1 5 A
Rear window defogger, tire pres-
sure warning system, main body
ECU, brake system, vehicle stabil-
ity control system, power door lock
system, smart key system
6 ECU-IG NO.2 5 A Electric power steering system
7HTR-IG 7.5 A Air conditioning system, PTC
heater
8 GAUGE 10 A
Back-up lights, audio system, shift
lock control system, moon roof,
vehicle control and operation data
recording, vehicle proximity notifi-
cation system
9 WASHER 15 A Windshield wipers and washer
10 WIPER 25 A Windshield wipers and washer
11 WIPER RR 15 A Windshield wipers and washer
12 P/W 30 A Power window
413
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
13 DOOR R/L 20 A Rear power window (left side)
14 DOOR D 20 A Front power window (left side)
15 CIG 15 A Power outlet
16 ACC 5 A
Main body ECU, audio system, out-
side rear view mirrors, shift lock
control system
17 D/L 25 A Power door lock system
18 OBD 7.5 A On-board diagnosis
19 STOP 7.5 A
Starter system, shift lock control
system, vehicle proximity notifica-
tion system, brake system, stop
lights, high mounted stoplight
20 AM1 7.5 A Starter system
21 FOG FR 15 A Front fog lights
22 S/ROOF 25 A Moon roof
23 S/HTR 15 A Seat heaters, air conditioning sys-
tem
■After a fuse is replaced
●If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb
may need replacement. (P. 415)
●If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
■If there is an overload in a circuit
The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.
Fuse Ampere Circuit
414
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or
injury.
●Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indicated, or use
any other object in place of a fuse.
●Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
●Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.
■Fuse box near the power control unit
Never check or replace the fuses as there are high voltage parts and wiring
near the fuse box.
Doing so may cause electric shock, resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
415
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level
of replacement varies depending on the bulb. As there is a danger
that components may be damaged, we recommend that replacement
is carried out by your Toyota dealer.
■Preparing for light bulb replacement
Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. (P. 505)
■Front bulb locations
Front side
marker
lights
Front turn signal lights
Parking lights
Headlights (low beam)
Headlights (high beam) and
daytime running lights
Front fog lights (if equipped)
416
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Replacing light bulbs
■Headlights and daytime running lights
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
High beam and daytime run-
ning lights (inside)
Low beam (outside)
■Rear bulb locations
Back-up lights
Rear turn signal lights
Tail and rear side
marker lights License plate lights
STEP
1
417
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Unplug the connector while
pushing the lock release.
High beam and daytime run-
ning lights
Low beam
Replace the light bulb, and install
the bulb base.
Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb
with the mounting, and insert.
Turn and secure the bulb base.
Shake the bulb base gently to
check that it is not loose, turn the
headlights and daytime running
lights and headlight low beams on
once and visually confirm that no
light is leaking through the mount-
ing.
■Front fog lights (if equipped)
Turn the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the light to
be replaced.
Turn the steering wheel to a point
that allows your hand to easily fit
between the tire and fender liner.
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
1
418
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Partly remove the fender liner.
Unplug the connector while
pushing the lock release.
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Install a new bulb.
Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb
with the mounting, and insert.
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
419
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Turn and secure the bulb. Install
the connector.
Shake the bulb base gently to
check that it is not loose, turn the
front fog light on once and visu-
ally confirm that no light is leaking
through the mounting.
When installing the fender liner, install by conducting
with the directions reversed.
■Parking lights
Unplug the connector while
pushing the lock release.
STEP
6
STEP
5
STEP
7
STEP
5
STEP
7
STEP
2
STEP
1
420
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
■Front side marker lights
Turn the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the light to
be replaced.
Turn the steering wheel to a point
that allows your hand to easily fit
between the tire and fender liner.
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
1
421
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Remove the clips.
Partly remove the fender liner.
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Remove the light bulb.
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
422
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
When installing the light bulb and bulb base, reverse the steps
listed.
Installing the clips.
■Front turn signal lights
Partly remove the fender liner as described in and
of “Front fog lights”. (P. 417)
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
STEP
6
STEP
7
STEP
1
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
423
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Rear turn signal lights, tail and rear side marker lights, and
back-up lights
Open the back door and remove
the bolts. Pull the lamp assembly
straight back to disengage the
clip and 2 pins.
Where the clip attaches
Pin
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Rear turn signal light
Tail and rear side marker light
Back-up light
STEP
1
STEP
2
424
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Remove the light bulb.
Rear turn signal light
Tail and rear side marker light
Back-up light
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
■License plate light
Remove the cover.
Insert a properly sized screw-
driver into the hole of the cover,
and pry off the cover as shown in
the illustration.
To prevent damaging the vehicle,
wrap the tip of the screwdriver
with tape.
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
425
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Lights other than the above
If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by
your Toyota dealer.
●Side turn signal lights
●Stop lights
●High mounted stoplight
■LED light bulbs
The stop lights and high mounted stoplight consist of a number of LEDs. If
any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have the
light replaced.
■Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does
not indicate a malfunction. Contact your Toyota dealer for more information
in the following situations:
●Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens.
●Water has built up inside the headlight.
426
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■Replacing light bulbs
●Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after
turning off the lights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
●Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. When it is
unavoidable to hold the glass portion, use and hold with a clean dry cloth
to avoid getting moisture and oils on the bulb.
Also, if the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.
●Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so
may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This
may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
■To prevent damage or fire
Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
When trouble arises 5
427
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers ......... 428
If your vehicle needs to
be towed ........................ 429
If you think something
is wrong ......................... 436
5-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If a warning light turns
on or a warning buzzer
sounds ........................... 437
If a warning message is
displayed........................ 447
If you have a flat tire......... 463
If the hybrid system will
not start.......................... 475
If the shift lever cannot
be shifted from P............ 477
If you lose your keys ........ 478
If the electronic key does
not operate properly....... 479
If the vehicle 12-volt
battery is discharged...... 481
If your vehicle
overheats ....................... 487
If the vehicle becomes
stuck .............................. 492
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an
emergency..................... 493
428
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers
■Emergency flashers
If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the hybrid system is
not operating (while the “READY” indicator is not illuminated), the 12-volt
battery may discharge.
The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the
vehicle has to be stopped in the road due to a breakdown, etc.
Press the switch.
All the turn signal lights will
flash. To turn them off, press
the switch once again.
5
When trouble arises
429
5-1. Essential information
If your vehicle needs to be towed
Situations needs to contact dealers before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact
your Toyota dealer before towing.
●A warning message for the hybrid system is shown on the multi-
information display and the vehicle does not move.
●The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by
your Toyota dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type
truck or flatbed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/pro-
vincial and local laws.
If towing your vehicle with a wheel-lift type truck from the front, the
vehicle's rear wheels and axles must be in good conditions.
(P. 430, 434)
If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flatbed truck.
430
5-1. Essential information
Towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck
to prevent body damage.
Towing with a wheel-lift type truck
From the front
Release the parking brake.
From the rear
Use a towing dolly under the
front wheels.
5
When trouble arises
431
5-1. Essential information
Using a flatbed truck
If your Toyota is transported by a
flatbed truck, it should be tied
down at the locations shown in
the illustration.
If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45.
Do not overly tighten the tie
downs or the vehicle may be
damaged.
Emergency towing
If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency
towing eyelet. This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads
for short distances at under 18 mph (30 km/h).
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The
vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in
good condition.
432
5-1. Essential information
Emergency towing procedure
Take out the towing eyelet. (P. 463)
Push the eyelet cover and then
open it.
Insert the towing eyelet into the
hole and tighten partially by
hand.
Tighten down the towing eyelet
securely using a wheel nut
wrench.
Securely attach a cable or chain to the towing eyelet.
Take care not to damage the vehicle body.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
5
When trouble arises
433
5-1. Essential information
Vehicles without a smart key system: Enter the vehicle being
towed and start the hybrid system.
If the hybrid system does not start, turn the engine switch to the “ON”
position.
Vehicles with a smart key system: Enter the vehicle being
towed and start the hybrid system.
If the hybrid system does not start, turn the “POWER” switch to ON
mode.
Shift the shift lever to N and release the parking brake.
When the shift lever cannot be shifted: P. 477
■While towing
If the hybrid system is off, the power assist for the brakes and steering will
not function, making steering and braking more difficult.
■Wheel nut wrench
Wheel nut wrench is installed in luggage compartment. (P. 463)
STEP
6
STEP
7
434
5-1. Essential information
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■When towing the vehicle
■While towing
●When towing using a rope, avoid sudden starts, etc. which place exces-
sive stress on the towing hook and rope.
The towing hook or rope may become damaged, broken debris may hit
people and cause serious damage.
●Do not turn the engine switch off (vehicles without a smart key system) or
the “POWER” switch off (vehicles with a smart key system).
There is a possibility that the steering wheel is locked and can not be oper-
ated.
■Installing towing eyelet to the vehicle
Make sure that towing eyelet is installed securely.
If not securely installed, towing eyelet may come loose during towing.
Be sure to transport the vehicle with the
front wheels raised or with all four
wheels raised off the ground. If the
vehicle is towed with the front wheels
contacting the ground, the drivetrain
and related parts may be damaged or
electricity generated by the operation of
the motor may cause a fire to occur
depending on the nature of the damage
or malfunction.
5
When trouble arises
435
5-1. Essential information
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type
truck
When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at
the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the
vehicle could be damaged while being towed.
■To prevent body damage when towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.
436
5-1. Essential information
If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably
needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.
■Visible symptoms
●Fluid leaks under the vehicle
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
●Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
● is shown on the multi-information display
■Audible symptoms
●Changes in exhaust sound
●Excessive tire squeal when cornering
●Strange noises related to the suspension system
●Pinging or other noises related to the hybrid system
■Operational symptoms
●Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly
●Appreciable loss of power
●Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
●Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
●Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost
touches the floor
5
When trouble arises
437
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds
Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle
may be dangerous.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake sys-
tem. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your
Toyota dealer.
*: Brake system warning buzzer:
When there is a possible problem that could affect braking performance, the
warning light will come on and a warning buzzer will sound.
Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:
P. 450
Warning light Warning light/Details
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Brake system warning light in red (warning buzzer)*
• Low brake fluid
• Malfunction in the brake system
This light also comes on when the parking brake is not
released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is
fully released the system is operating normally.
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights
comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes
off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.
However, if this continues to occur, have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
438
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehi-
cle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
Failure to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to
the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
Warning light Warning light/Details
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle's charging sys-
tem
Warning light Warning light/Details
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The hybrid system;
• The electronic engine control system; or
• The electronic throttle control system
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system;
• The front passenger occupant classification system; or
• The seat belt pretensioner system
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
ABS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The ABS; or
• The brake assist system
5
When trouble arises
439
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedures.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,
check that the warning light goes off.
Electric power steering system warning light (warn-
ing buzzer)
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power
Steering) system
(Comes on)
Slip indicator light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• Vehicle stability control;
• Traction control; or
• Hill-start assist control
Brake system warning light in yellow
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The regenerative brake system; or
• The electronically controlled brake system
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
(Flashes)
Low fuel level warning
light
Remaining fuel is low
When the remaining fuel
is approximately 1.3 gal.
(5.0 L, 1.1 Imp. gal.) or
less, a buzzer sounds
and the lowest segment
of the fuel gauge flashes
Refuel the vehicle.
Warning light Warning light/Details
440
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Seat belt reminder light
(warning buzzer)*
Warns the driver and front
passenger to fasten their
seat belt
Fasten the seat belt.
If the front passenger’s
seat is occupied, the
front passenger’s seat
belt also needs to be
fastened to make the
reminder light (warning
buzzer) go off.
Master warning light
A buzzer sounds and the
warning light comes on
and flashes to indicate
that the master warning
system has detected a
malfunction
P. 447
Tire pressure warning light
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pres-
sure such as
• Natural causes (P. 442)
• Flat tire (P. 463)
Adjust the tire inflation
pressure to the speci-
fied level.
The light will turn off
after a few minutes. In
case the light does not
turn off even if the tire
inflation pressure is
adjusted, have the
system checked by
your Toyota dealer.
When the light comes on
after blinking for 1 minute:
Malfunction in the tire
pressure warning system
(P. 443)
Have the system
checked by your Toyota
dealer.
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
5
When trouble arises
441
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
*: Driver's and front passenger's seat belt buzzer:
The driver's and front passenger's seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver
and front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. Once the engine
switch is turned to the “ON” or “START” position (vehicles without a smart
key system) or the “POWER” switch is turned to ON mode (vehicles with a
smart key system), the buzzer sounds for 6 seconds. If the vehicle reaches a
speed of 12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer sounds once. If the seat belt is still
unfastened after 30 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 sec-
onds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a dif-
ferent tone for 20 more seconds.
■SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front impact
sensors, side impact sensors, driver's seat belt buckle switch, front passen-
ger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors), “AIR BAG ON” indi-
cator light, “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light, front passenger's seat belt buckle
switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, airbags, interconnecting wiring
and power sources. (P. 438)
■Front passenger detection sensor, passenger seat belt reminder and
warning buzzer
●If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger
detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning
buzzer to sound even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.
●If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passen-
ger, and the warning light may not operate properly.
■Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)
When the 12-volt battery charge becomes insufficient or the voltage tempo-
rarily drops, the electric power steering system warning light may come on
and the warning buzzer may sound.
442
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
The malfunction indicator lamp will come on if the fuel tank cap becomes
loose. If the fuel tank cap is loose, tighten it securely. The malfunction indica-
tor lamp will go off after several trips.
If the malfunction indicator lamp does not go off even after several trips, con-
tact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
■When the tire pressure warning light comes on
Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level.
Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch will not turn off the tire
pressure warning light.
■The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes
The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such
as natural air leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by tem-
perature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the
warning light (after a few minutes).
■When a tire is replaced with a spare tire
The compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will
not turn off even though the flat tire has been replaced with the spare
tire. Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the tire infla-
tion pressure. The tire pressure warning light will go off after a few min-
utes.
5
When trouble arises
443
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■If the tire pressure warning system is not functioning
The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following condi-
tions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
●If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters are used
●If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is
not registered in the tire pressure warning computer
●If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) or
higher
The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following condi-
tions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
●If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies
are nearby
●If a radio set at a similar frequency is in use in the vehicle
●If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed
●If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the
wheels or wheel housings
●If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used (Even if you use Toyota
wheels, the tire pressure warning system may not work properly with
some types of tires.)
●If tire chains are used
■If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking
for 1 minute
If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1
minute when the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position (vehicles
without a smart key system) or the “POWER” switch is turned to ON
mode (vehicles with a smart key system), have it checked by your
Toyota dealer.
■Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
The vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled. (Cus-
tomizable features P. 522) However, Toyota recommends that the seat
belt reminder buzzer be operational to alert the driver and front passenger
when seat belts are not fastened.
444
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■When the electric power steering system warning light comes on
The steering wheel may become extremely heavy.
If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, hold
firmly and operate using more force than usual.
■If the tire pressure warning light comes on
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could
cause a loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
●Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire
inflation pressure immediately.
●If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pres-
sure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires.
If a tire is flat, change it with the spare tire and have the flat tire
repaired by the nearest Toyota dealer.
●Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate,
you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
■If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
5
When trouble arises
445
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■Maintenance of the tires
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a differ-
ent size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a sub-
stitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire
pressure warning light).
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operat-
ing properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indi-
cator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure
warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illumi-
nated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumi-
nated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended.
446
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a vari-
ety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires
or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pres-
sure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alter-
nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to
continue to function properly.
NOTICE
■To ensure the tire pressure warning system operates properly
Do not install tires with different specifications or makers, as the tire
pressure warning system may not operate properly.
5
When trouble arises
447
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning message is displayed
If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and
perform the following actions:
Multi-information display
Warning message details and/
or correction procedures are
shown on the multi-informa-
tion display.
Master warning light
The master warning light also
comes on or flashes in order to
indicate that a message is cur-
rently being displayed on the
multi-information display.
If any of the warning lights comes on again after the following
actions have been performed, contact your Toyota dealer.
448
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehi-
cle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.
Warning message Details
Indicates a malfunction in the hybrid system
A buzzer sounds in accordance with the warning
message that is displayed.
Indicates that the high engine coolant tempera-
ture is too high
Indicates abnormal engine oil pressure
A buzzer also sounds.
The warning message is shown if the engine oil
pressure is too low.
5
When trouble arises
449
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Have the vehicle inspected immediately.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-infor-
mation display. Failure to investigate the cause of the following warn-
ings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly
cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
Warning message Details
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
•Indicates a malfunction in the smart key system
•Indicates a malfunction in the steering lock sys-
tem
A buzzer also sounds.
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the cruise control
system
A buzzer also sounds.
450
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedures.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-infor-
mation display. After taking the specified steps to correct the sus-
pected problem, check that the warning message goes off.
Warning message Details Correction procedure
Indicates that one or
more of the side
doors is not fully
closed
The system also indi-
cates which doors are
not fully closed.
If the vehicle reaches
a speed of 3 mph (5
km/h), flashes
and a buzzer sounds
to indicate that the
door(s) are not yet
fully closed.
Make sure that all the
side doors are closed.
Indicates that the
back door is not fully
closed
If the vehicle reaches
a speed of 3 mph (5
km/h), flashes
and a buzzer sounds
to indicate that the
back door is not yet
fully closed.
Close the back door.
5
When trouble arises
451
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
Indicates that the
moon roof is not fully
closed (with the
“POWER” switch off
and the driver's door
is open)
A buzzer also sounds.
Close the moon roof.
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
(red)
Indicates that the
parking brake is still
engaged
If the vehicle reaches
a speed of 3 mph (5
km/h), flashes
and a buzzer sounds
to indicate that the
parking brake is still
engaged.
Release the parking
brake.
(U.S.A. only)
Indicates that all
maintenance accord-
ing to the driven dis-
tance on the
maintenance sched-
ule*1 should be per-
formed soon If necessary, perform
maintenance.
Comes on approxi-
mately 4500 miles
(7200 km) after the
maintenance data has
been reset
Warning message Details Correction procedure
452
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
(U.S.A. only)
Indicates that all
maintenance is
required to corre-
spond to the driven
distance on the main-
tenance schedule*1Perform the necessary
maintenance.
Please reset the main-
tenance data after the
maintenance is per-
formed.(P. 353)
Comes on approxi-
mately 5000 miles
(8000 km) after the
maintenance data has
been reset
(The indicator will not
work properly unless
the maintenance data
has been reset)
Indicates that the
hybrid system has
overheated
A buzzer also sounds.
This message may be
displayed when driv-
ing under severe oper-
ating conditions. (For
example, when driv-
ing up a long steep
hill.)
Stop and check.
(P. 487)
(Flashes)
Indicates that the
hybrid battery (trac-
tion battery) is low
A buzzer also sounds.
When stopping the
vehicle for a long period
of time, shift the shift
lever to P. The hybrid
battery (traction battery)
cannot be charged with
the shift position in N.
Warning message Details Correction procedure
5
When trouble arises
453
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
(Flashes)
Indicates that the
hybrid battery (trac-
tion battery) power
has dropped because
a long period of time
has elapsed after
shifting the shift lever
to N
A buzzer also sounds.
Shift the shift lever to P
and restart the hybrid
system when starting
the vehicle.
(Flashes)
Indicates that the
driver’s door was
opened with the shift
position in N, D or B
A buzzer also sounds.
Shift the shift lever to P.
(Flashes)
Indicates that the
accelerator pedal is
depressed while the
shift position is in N
A buzzer also sounds.
Release the accelera-
tor pedal and shift the
shift lever to D, B or R.
(Flashes)
Indicates that the
engine switch is
turned to the “ACC”
or “LOCK” position
(vehicles without a
smart key system) or
the “POWER” switch
is turned to ACCES-
SORY mode or turned
off (vehicles with a
smart key system)
and the driver's door
is opened while the
lights are turned on
A buzzer also sounds.
Turn the lights off.
Warning message Details Correction procedure
454
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Indicates that the EV
drive mode is not
available*2
A buzzer also sounds.
The reason the EV
drive mode is not
available (the vehicle
is idling, battery
charge is low, speed is
higher than the EV
drive mode operating
speed range, acceler-
ator pedal is
depressed too much)
may be displayed.
Use the EV drive mode
when it becomes avail-
able.
(Flashes 3
times)
Indicates that the EV
drive mode has been
automatically can-
celled*2
A buzzer also sounds.
The reason the EV
drive mode is not
available (the battery
charge is low, speed is
higher than the EV
drive mode speed
range, accelerator
pedal is depressed too
much) may be dis-
played.
Drive the vehicle for a
while.
*1: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your
vehicle.
*2: For the EV drive mode operating conditions:
P. 172
Warning message Details Correction procedure
5
When trouble arises
455
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Have the malfunction repaired immediately. (vehicles with a
smart key system)
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,
check that the warning message and light go off.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details Correction
procedure
Once
(Flashes)
The electronic
key is not
detected when
an attempt is
made to start
the hybrid sys-
tem.
Start the hybrid
system with the
electronic key
present.
456
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Once
3 times
(Flashes)
The electronic
key was carried
outside the
vehicle and the
driver’s door
was opened
and closed
while the shift
lever was in P
without turning
off the
“POWER”
switch.
Turn the
“POWER”
switch off or
bring the elec-
tronic key back
into the vehicle.
The electronic
key was carried
outside the
vehicle and a
door other than
the driver's door
was opened
and closed
while the
“POWER”
switch was in a
mode other
than off.
Bring the elec-
tronic key back
into the vehicle.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details Correction
procedure
5
When trouble arises
457
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Once
Continuous
(For 5 seconds)
(Displayed alter-
nately)
(Flashes)
An attempt was
made to lock
the doors using
the entry func-
tion after the
electronic key
was carried out-
side the vehicle
without turning
off the
“POWER”
switch.
Turn the
“POWER”
switch off and
lock the doors
again.
9 times
(Flashes)
An attempt was
made to start
the hybrid sys-
tem without the
electronic key
being present,
or the elec-
tronic key was
not functioning
normally.
An attempt was
made to drive
when the regu-
lar key was not
inside the vehi-
cle.
Confirm that the
electronic key is
inside the vehi-
cle.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details Correction
procedure
458
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Continuous
(Flashes)
The driver’s
door was
opened while a
shift lever posi-
tion other than
P was selected
without turning
off the
“POWER”
switch.
Shift the shift
lever to P.
Continuous
Continuous
(Displayed alter-
nately)
(Flashes)
The electronic
key was carried
outside the
vehicle and the
driver’s door
was opened
and closed
while a shift
lever position
other than P
was selected
without turning
off the
“POWER”
switch.
• Shift the shift
lever to P.
• Bring the elec-
tronic key back
into the vehicle.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details Correction
procedure
5
When trouble arises
459
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Once
Continuous
(Flashes)
An attempt was
made to lock
the doors using
the smart key
system while
the electronic
key was still
inside the vehi-
cle.
Retrieve the
electronic key
from the vehi-
cle and lock the
doors again.
An attempt was
made to lock
either front door
by opening a
door and putting
the inside door
lock button into
the lock posi-
tion, and then
closing the door
while pulling on
the outside door
handle with the
electronic key
still inside the
vehicle.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details Correction
procedure
460
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Once
(Flashes)
• The electronic
key could not be
detected when
the “POWER”
switch was
pressed after
the doors were
unlocked with
the mechanical
key.
• The electronic
key could not be
detected two
consecutive
times when the
“POWER”
switch was
pressed.
Touch the elec-
tronic key to the
“POWER”
switch while
depressing the
brake pedal.
Once
(Flashes)
An attempt was
made to start
the hybrid sys-
tem with the
shift lever in a
position other
than P.
Shift the shift
lever to P and
start the hybrid
system.
Power was
turned off due to
the automatic
power off func-
tion.
Next time when
starting the
hybrid system,
increase the
engine speed
slightly and
maintain that
level for approx-
imately 5 min-
utes to recharge
the 12-volt-bat-
tery.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details Correction
procedure
5
When trouble arises
461
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Once
The electronic
key has a low
battery.
Replace the
electronic key
battery.
(P. 401)
Once
(Flashes)
The driver's
door was
opened and
closed with the
“POWER”
switch turned off
and then the
“POWER”
switch was put
in ACCES-
SORY mode
twice without
the hybrid sys-
tem being
started.
Press the
“POWER”
switch while
depressing the
brake pedal.
During a hybrid
system starting
procedure in the
event that the
electronic key
was not func-
tioning properly
(P. 479), the
“POWER”
switch was
touched with
the electronic
key.
Press the
“POWER”
switch within 10
seconds of the
buzzer sound-
ing.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details Correction
procedure
462
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Once
(Flashes)
The steering
lock could not
be released
within 3 sec-
onds of the
“POWER”
switch being
pressed.
Press the
“POWER”
switch while
depressing the
brake pedal and
moving the
steering wheel
left and right.
Once
(Flashes)
The “POWER”
switch has been
turned off with
the shift lever in
a position other
than P.
Shift the shift
lever to P.
Once
(Flashes)
After the
“POWER”
switch has been
turned off with
the shift lever in
a position other
than P, the shift
lever has been
shifted to P.
Turn the
“POWER”
switch off.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details Correction
procedure
5
When trouble arises
463
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a flat tire
Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire. The flat tire can be
replaced with the spare tire.
■Before jacking up the vehicle
●Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
●Set the parking brake.
●Shift the shift lever to P.
●Stop the hybrid system.
●Turn on the emergency flashers.
■Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
Jack
Spare tire Tool bag*
Spare wheel
cushions
Luggage floor
cover
464
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the jack
Move the driver seat to the front
most position.
Push the tabs in and remove the
cover by pulling it towards you.
For tightening
For loosening
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
5
When trouble arises
465
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the compact spare tire
Remove the luggage floor cover
by lifting up the points indicated
by the arrows.
Remove the spare wheel cush-
ions, then loosen the center fas-
tener that secures the spare tire.
STEP
1
STEP
2
466
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Replacing a flat tire
Chock the tires.
For vehicles with steel wheels,
remove the wheel ornament
using the wrench.
To protect the wheel ornament,
place a rag between the wrench
and the wheel ornament.
STEP
1
Flat tire Wheel chock
positions
Front
Left-
hand
side
Behind the
rear right-
hand side
tire
Right-
hand
side
Behind the
rear left-
hand side
tire
Rear
Left-
hand
side
In front of
the front
right-hand
side tire
Right-
hand
side
In front of
the front
left-hand
side tire
STEP
2
5
When trouble arises
467
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts
(one turn).
Turn the tire jack portion “A” by
hand until the notch of the jack is
in contact with the jack point.
Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
Remove all the wheel nuts and
the tire.
When resting the tire on the
ground, place the tire so that the
wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
468
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Installing the compact spare tire
Remove any dirt or foreign mat-
ter from the wheel contact sur-
face.
If foreign matter is on the wheel
contact surface, the wheel nuts
may loosen while the vehicle is
in motion, causing the tire to
come off.
Install the spare tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by
hand by approximately the same amount.
When replacing a steel wheel
with a compact spare tire, tighten
the wheel nuts until the tapered
portion comes into loose contact
with the disc wheel seat.
When replacing an aluminum
wheel with a compact spare tire,
tighten the wheel nuts until the
tapered portion comes into loose
contact with the disc wheel seat.
STEP
1
STEP
2
Tapered portion
Disc
wheel
seat
Tapered portion
Disc
wheel
seat
5
When trouble arises
469
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Lower the vehicle.
Firmly tighten each wheel nut
two or three times in the order
shown in the illustration.
Tightening torque:
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
Stow the tire jack and all tools.
Stow the flat tire in the luggage
compartment as shown in the
illustration.
Stow the spare wheel cushions and luggage floor cover in the
luggage compartment.
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
STEP
7
470
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■The compact spare tire
●The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE
ONLY” on the tire sidewall.
Use the compact spare tire temporarily, and only in an emergency.
●Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the compact spare
tire. (P. 504)
■After completing the tire change
The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (P. 385)
■When using the compact spare tire
As the compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be
indicated by the tire pressure warning system. Also, if you replace the
compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the
light remains on.
■If you have a flat front tire on a road covered with snow or ice
Install the compact spare tire on one of the rear wheels of the vehicle.
Perform the following steps and fit tire chains to the front tires:
Replace a rear tire with the compact spare tire.
Replace the flat front tire with the tire removed from the rear of
the vehicle.
Fit tire chains to the front tires.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
5
When trouble arises
471
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■When using the compact spare tire
●Remember that the compact spare tire provided is specifically
designed for use with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire
on another vehicle.
●Do not use more than one compact spare tire simultaneously.
●Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possi-
ble.
●Avoid sudden acceleration, deceleration and braking, as well as sharp
cornering.
■When storing the compact spare tire
Be careful not to catch fingers or other body parts between the compact
spare tire and the body of the vehicle.
■When the compact spare tire is attached
The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following sys-
tems may not operate correctly:
●ABS & Brake assist
●VSC
●TRAC
●EPS
●Cruise control (if equipped)
■Speed limit when using the compact spare tire
Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact
spare tire is installed on the vehicle.
The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure
to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or seri-
ous injury.
472
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■Using the tire jack
Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off
the jack, leading to death or serious injury.
●Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or
installing and removing tire chains.
●Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat
tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for
replacing tires on this vehicle.
●Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.
●Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack.
●Do not start or run the hybrid system while your vehicle is supported by
the jack.
●Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.
●When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
●Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to
replace the tire.
●Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one
working on or near the vehicle may be injured.
5
When trouble arises
473
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■Replacing a flat tire
●Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immedi-
ately after the vehicle has been driven.
After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around
the brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet
or other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.
●Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the
wheel while the vehicle is moving.
●Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to
loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.
• Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf (103
N•m, 10.5 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
• When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifi-
cally designed for that wheel.
• If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut
threads or bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
• When installing the wheel nuts, be sure to install them with the
tapered ends facing inward. (P. 397)
474
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire.
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the
wheel beyond repair.
■Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire
installed on the vehicle.
The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire
compared to when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving
over uneven road surfaces.
■Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire
Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.
Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving
performance.
■When replacing the tires
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
■To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is
used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon
as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 385)
5
When trouble arises
475
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the hybrid system will not start
Reasons for the hybrid system not starting vary depending on the
situation. Check the following and perform the appropriate proce-
dure:
■The hybrid system will not start even though the correct
starting procedure is being followed. (P. 160, 164)
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
●Vehicles with a smart key system: The electronic key may not
be functioning properly. (P. 479)
●There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle. (P. 105)
●Vehicles with immobilizer system: There may be a malfunc-
tion in the immobilizer system. (P. 110)
●There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.
●Vehicles with a smart key system: The hybrid system may be
malfunctioning due to an electrical problem such as an open
circuit or a blown fuse. However, depending on the type of
malfunction, an interim measure is available to start the hybrid
system. (P. 476)
■The interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does
not sound or sounds at a low volume.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
●The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (P. 481)
●The 12-volt battery terminal connections may be loose or cor-
roded.
476
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Emergency start function (vehicles with a smart key system)
When the hybrid system does not start, the following steps can be
used as an interim measure to start the hybrid system if the
“POWER” switch is functioning normally:
Shift the shift lever to P.
Set the parking brake.
Turn the “POWER” switch to ACCESSORY mode.
Press and hold the “POWER” switch for about 15 seconds
while depressing the brake pedal firmly.
Even if the hybrid system can be started using the above steps, the
system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
■The interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn
does not sound.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
●One or both of the 12-volt battery terminals may be discon-
nected.
●The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (P. 481)
Contact your Toyota dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if
repair procedures are unknown.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
5
When trouble arises
477
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake pedal,
there may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to pre-
vent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to
ensure that the shift lever can be shifted:
Set the parking brake.
Vehicles without a smart key system
Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
Turn the “POWER” switch to ACCESSORY mode.
Depress the brake pedal.
Pry the cover up with a flat-
head screwdriver or equiva-
lent tool.
To prevent damage to the
cover, cover the tip of the
screwdriver with a rag.
Press the shift lock override
button.
The shift lever can be shifted
while the button is pressed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
478
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you lose your keys
New genuine keys can be made by your Toyota dealer. For vehicles
without a smart key system, bring a master key and the key number
stamped on the key number plate. For vehicles with a smart key sys-
tem, bring the other key and the key number stamped on the key
number plate.
5
When trouble arises
479
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the electronic key does not operate properly (vehicles with a smart key system)
Locking and unlocking the doors
Use the mechanical key (P.
44) in order to perform the fol-
lowing operations (driver’s door
only):
Unlocks the doors
Locks all the doors
Turning the key rearward unlocks
the driver’s door. Turning the key
once again within 5 seconds
unlocks the other doors.
Starting the hybrid system
Ensure that the shift lever is in P and depress the brake pedal.
Touch the Toyota emblem side of
the electronic key to the
“POWER” switch.
When the electronic key is
detected, a buzzer sounds and
the “POWER” switch will turn to
ON mode.
If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is inter-
rupted (P. 55) or the electronic key cannot be used because the
battery is depleted, the smart key system and wireless remote con-
trol cannot be used. In such cases, the doors can be opened and the
hybrid system can be started by following the procedure below.
STEP
1
STEP
2
480
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Firmly depress the brake pedal and check that is dis-
played on the multi-information display.
Press the “POWER” switch.
In the event that the “POWER” switch still cannot be operated, con-
tact your Toyota dealer.
■Stopping the hybrid system
Shift the shift lever to P and press the “POWER” switch as you normally do
when stopping the hybrid system.
■Replacing the key battery
As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the
electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted.
(P. 401)
■Changing “POWER” switch modes
Release the brake pedal and press the “POWER” switch in above.
The hybrid system does not start and modes will be changed each time the
switch is pressed. (P. 166)
■If the doors cannot be locked or unlocked by the smart key system
Lock and unlock the doors by the mechanical key or wireless remote control.
■When the electronic key does not work properly
Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is set, cancel the function.
(P. 54)
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
3
5
When trouble arises
481
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle 12-volt battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the hybrid system if
the vehicle’s 12-volt battery is discharged.
You can also call your Toyota dealer or a qualified repair shop.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehi-
cle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by follow-
ing the steps below.
Open the hood and remove
the fuse box cover.
Push the tab in and lift the
cover off.
Open the exclusive jump start-
ing terminal cover.
Push the tab in and open the
cover.
STEP
1
STEP
2
482
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedure:
Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the exclusive jump
starting terminal on your vehicle.
Connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to the
positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle.
Connect a negative cable clamp to the negative (-) battery termi-
nal on the second vehicle.
Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative cable to a
solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the exclu-
sive jump starting terminal and any moving parts, as shown in
the illustration.
STEP
3
5
When trouble arises
483
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine
speed slightly and maintain that level for approximately 5
minutes to recharge the 12-volt battery of your vehicle.
Vehicles with a smart key system only: Open and close any
of the doors of your vehicle with the “POWER” switch off.
Vehicles without a smart key system
Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start
the hybrid system of your vehicle by turning the engine
switch to the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start
the hybrid system of your vehicle by turning the “POWER”
switch to ON mode.
Make sure the “READY” indicator comes on. If the indicator
does not come on, contact your Toyota dealer.
Once the hybrid system has started, remove the jumper
cables in the exact reverse order from which they were con-
nected.
Close the exclusive jump starting terminal cover, and rein-
stall the fuse box cover to its original position.
When installing, first hook the fuse box cover onto the two rear
tabs.
Once the hybrid system starts, have the vehicle inspected at your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
STEP
7
STEP
8
STEP
9
484
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■Starting the hybrid system when the 12-volt battery is discharged
The hybrid system cannot be started by push-starting.
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
●Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the hybrid system is
off.
●Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is run-
ning at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.
■Precautions when the 12-volt battery is discharged (vehicles with a
smart key system)
●In some cases, it may not be possible to unlock the doors using the smart
key system immediately after the 12-volt battery has been disconnected
and reconnected. Use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key
to lock or unlock the doors.
●The hybrid system may not start on the first attempt after the 12-volt bat-
tery has recharged but will start normally after the second attempt. This is
not a malfunction.
●The “POWER” switch mode is memorized by the vehicle. When the 12-
volt battery is reconnected, the system will return to the mode it was in
before the 12-volt battery was discharged. Before disconnecting the 12-
volt battery, turn the “POWER” switch off.
If the “POWER” switch was in ACCESSORY or ON mode before the 12-
volt battery was discharged, the audio system and/or air conditioning
system may operate when the 12-volt battery is reconnected.
■Charging the 12-volt battery
The electricity stored in the 12-volt battery will discharge gradually even
when the vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining
effects of certain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the
12-volt battery may discharge, and the hybrid system may be unable to start.
(The 12-volt battery recharges automatically while the hybrid system is oper-
ating.)
5
When trouble arises
485
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■Avoiding 12-volt battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flam-
mable gas that may be emitted from the 12-volt battery:
●Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that
it is not unintentionally in contact with anything other than the intended ter-
minal.
●Do not allow the other end of the jumper cable connected to the “+” termi-
nal to come into contact with any other parts or metal surfaces in the area,
such as brackets or unpainted metal.
●Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact
with each other.
●Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near
the 12-volt battery.
■After recharging the 12-volt battery
Have the 12-volt battery inspected at your Toyota dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
If the 12-volt battery is deteriorating, continued use may cause the 12-volt
battery to emit a malodorous gas, which may be detrimental to the health of
passengers.
■When replacing the 12-volt battery
P. 383
486
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■12-volt battery precautions
The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte,
while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following
precautions when handling the 12-volt battery:
●When working with the 12-volt battery, always wear safety glasses and
take care not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with
skin, clothing or the vehicle body.
●Do not lean over the 12-volt battery.
●In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes,
immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention
can be received.
●Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and
other battery-related parts.
●Do not allow children near the 12-volt battery.
NOTICE
■When handling jumper cables
When connecting the jumper cables, ensure that they do not become entan-
gled in the cooling fan or belt.
■Exclusive jump starting terminal
The exclusive jump starting terminal is to be used when charging the 12-volt
battery from another vehicle in an emergency. It cannot be used to jump start
another vehicle.
5
When trouble arises
487
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle overheats
Correction procedures
■If is shown on the multi-information display
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air condition-
ing system, and then stop the hybrid system.
If you see steam:
Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides.
If you do not see steam:
Carefully lift the hood.
After the hybrid system has
cooled down sufficiently, inspect
the hoses and radiator core
(radiator) for any leaks.
Radiator
Cooling fan
If a large amount of coolant leaks,
immediately contact your Toyota
dealer.
The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating.
● (P. 448) is shown on the multi-information display.
●The hybrid system overheat warning message (P. 452) is
shown on the multi-information display.
●Steam comes out from under the hood.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
488
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
The coolant level is satisfactory if
it is between the “FULL” and
“LOW” lines on the reservoir.
Reservoir
“FULL”
“LOW”
Add coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emer-
gency if coolant is unavailable.
Start the hybrid system and turn the air conditioning system
on to check that the radiator cooling fan operates and to
check for coolant leaks from the radiator or hoses.
The fan operates when the air conditioning system is turned on
immediately after a cold start. Confirm that the fan is operating by
checking the fan sound and air flow. If it is difficult to check these,
turn the air conditioning system on and off repeatedly.
(The fan may not operate in freezing temperatures.)
If the fan is not operating:
Stop the hybrid system immediately and contact your
Toyota dealer.
If the fan is operating:
Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Toyota dealer.
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
STEP
7
5
When trouble arises
489
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■If the hybrid system overheat warning message is shown on
the multi-information display
Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Stop the hybrid system and carefully lift the hood.
After the hybrid system has
cooled down, inspect the hoses
and radiator core (radiator) for
any leaks.
Radiator
Cooling fan
If a large amount of coolant leaks,
immediately contact your Toyota
dealer.
The coolant level is satisfactory if
it is between the “F” and “L” lines
on the reservoir.
Reservoir
“F”
“L”
Add coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emer-
gency if coolant is unavailable.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
490
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Start the hybrid system and check for the multi-information
display.
If the message does not disappear:
Stop the hybrid system and contact your Toyota dealer.
If the message is not displayed:
Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
■To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of
your vehicle
●If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until
the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, caus-
ing serious injuries such as burns.
●After the hybrid system has been turned off, check that on the
multi-information display and the “READY” indicator are off.
When the hybrid system is operating, the gasoline engine may automati-
cally start, or the cooling fan may suddenly operate even if the gasoline
engine stops. Do not touch or approach rotating parts such as the fan,
which may lead to fingers or clothing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler)
getting caught, resulting in serious injury.
●Do not loosen the radiator cap while the hybrid system and radiator are
hot.
Serious injuries, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam
released under pressure.
STEP
6
5
When trouble arises
491
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■When adding engine/power control unit coolant
Wait until the hybrid system has cooled down before adding engine/power
control unit coolant.
When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot hybrid sys-
tem too quickly can cause damage to the hybrid system.
■To prevent damage to the cooling system
Observe the following precautions:
●Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust
etc.).
●Do not use any coolant additive.
492
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle becomes stuck
CAUTION
■When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the sur-
rounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The
vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free.
Use extreme caution.
■When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may
cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■To avoid damage to the transmission and other components
●Avoid spinning the wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more
than necessary.
●If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed,
the vehicle may require towing to be freed.
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle
becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow:
Shift the shift lever to P and set the parking brake. Stop the
hybrid system.
Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the stuck tire.
Place wood, stones or some other material under the tires
to help provide traction.
Restart the hybrid system.
Shift the shift lever to the D or R position and carefully apply
the accelerator to free the vehicle.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
5
When trouble arises
493
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency
Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the
vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following pro-
cedure:
Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly
depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the
effort required to slow the vehicle.
Shift the shift lever to N.
If the shift lever is shifted to N
After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the
road.
Stop the hybrid system.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N
Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce
vehicle speed as much as possible.
Vehicles without a smart key
system: Stop the hybrid sys-
tem by turning the engine
switch to the “ACC” position.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
3
STEP
4
494
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■If the hybrid system has to be turned off while driving
Power assist for the steering wheel will be lost, making the steering wheel
heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the hybrid
system.
●Vehicles without a smart key system: Never attempt to remove the key, as
doing so will lock the steering wheel.
Vehicles with a smart key sys-
tem: To stop the hybrid sys-
tem, press and hold the
“POWER” switch for 2 consec-
utive seconds or more, or
press it briefly 3 times or more
in succession.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
STEP
4
Press and hold for 2 seconds or more,
or press briefly 3 times or more
STEP
5
496
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weights
*1: Unladen vehicles
*2: P175/65R15 tires
*3: P195/50R16 tires
Overall length 157.3 in. (3995 mm)
Overall width 66.7 in. (1695 mm)
Overall height*1
Without moon roof
56.9 in. (1445 mm)
With moon roof
57.7 in. (1465 mm)
Wheelbase 100.4 in. (2550 mm)
Tread
Front 58.3 in. (1480 mm)*2
57.5 in. (1460 mm)*3
Rear 58.1 in. (1475 mm)*2
57.1 in. (1450 mm)*3
Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants + luggage) 845 lb. (380 kg)
497
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Vehicle identification
■Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your
vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Toyota. It is
used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped under
the front passenger’s seat.
This number is stamped on the
top left of the instrument panel.
This number is also on the Certi-
fication Label.
498
6-1. Specifications
■Engine number
The engine number is stamped
on the engine block as shown.
Engine
Fuel
Electric motor (Traction motor)
Model 1NZ-FXE
Type 4-cylinder in line, 4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke 2.95 3.33 in. (75.0 84.7 mm)
Displacement 91.3 cu.in. (1497 cm3)
Valve clearance
(engine cold)
Intake: 0.006 0.010 in. (0.15 0.25 mm)
Exhaust: 0.010 0.014 in. (0.25 0.35 mm)
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only
Octane rating 87 (Research octane number 91) or higher
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference) 9.5 gal. (36 L, 7.9 Imp. gal.)
Type Permanent magnet synchronous motor
Maximum output 45 kW
Maximum torque 125 ft•lbf (169 N•m, 17.2 kgf•m)
499
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Hybrid battery (Traction battery)
Lubrication system
*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the
engine oil. Warm up the engine and turn off the hybrid system, wait more
than 5 minutes, and check the oil level on the dipstick.
■Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use
Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy
the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20
SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for
good fuel economy and good
starting in cold weather.
If SAE 0W-20 is not available,
SAE 5W-20 oil may be used.
However, it must be replaced
with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil
change.
Type Nickel-metal hydride battery
Voltage 7.2 V/module
Capacity 6.5 Ah (3HR)
Quantity 20 modules
Overall voltage 144 V
Oil capacity (Drain and
refill reference*)
With filter
Without filter
3.9 qt. (3.7 L, 3.3 Imp. qt.)
3.6 qt. (3.4 L, 3.0 Imp. qt.)
Outside temperature
500
6-1. Specifications
Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):
• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows
cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier
starting of the engine in cold weather.
• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when
the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a
higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high
speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
How to read oil container label:
The International Lubricant Specification Advisory Committee
(ILSAC) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help
you select the oil you should use.
Cooling system
Capacity
Gasoline engine
Power control unit
5.6 qt. (5.3 L, 4.7 Imp. qt.)
1.7 qt. (1.6 L, 1.4 Imp. qt.)
Coolant type
Use either of the following:
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• A similar high-quality ethylene glycol-
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite,
and non-borate coolant with long-life
hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
501
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Ignition system
Electrical system
Spark plug
Make
Gap
DENSO FK16R-A8
0.03 in. (0.8 mm)
NOTICE
■Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.
12-volt battery
Open voltage* at
68F (20C):
Fully charged
Half charged
Discharged
12.5 V or over
11.0 12.5 V
Under11.0 V
(*: Voltage checked 20 minutes after the hybrid
system and all the lights are turned off)
Charging rates 3.5 A or less
(Recharge within 10 hours)
502
6-1. Specifications
Hybrid transmission
*: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity. If replacement is necessary, con-
tact your Toyota dealer.
Fluid capacity*3.5 qt. (3.3 L, 2.9 Imp. qt.)
Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS
NOTICE
■Transmission fluid type
Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause
deterioration in shift quality, locking up of the transmission accompanied by
vibration and, ultimately, damage to the vehicle’s transmission.
503
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Brakes
*1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 66 lbf (294 N, 30
kgf) while the hybrid system is operating
*2: Parking brake lever travel when pulled up with a force of 45 lbf (200 N, 20
kgf)
Steering
Pedal clearance*12.8 in. (70 mm) Min.
Pedal free play 0.04 0.24 in. (1.0 6.0 mm)
Brake pad wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Brake lining wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake lever travel*28 11 clicks
Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
504
6-1. Specifications
Tires and wheels
15-inch tires
16-inch tires
Tire size P175/65R15 84H, T125/70D16 96M
(spare)
Tire inflation pressure
(recommended cold
tire inflation pressure)
Front:
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear:
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare:
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Never exceed the maximum cold tire infla-
tion pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size 15 5J, 16 4T (spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
Tire size P195/50R16 83V, T125/70D16 96M
(spare)
Front and rear tire inflation
pressure
(recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Front:
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear:
29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare:
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Never exceed the maximum cold tire infla-
tion pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size 16 6J, 16 4T (spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
505
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Light bulbs
*1: If equipped
*2: Side turn signal lights should be replaced as an assembly.
A: H11 halogen bulbs B: HB3 halogen bulbs
C: H16 halogen bulbs D: Wedge base bulbs (clear)
E: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
Light bulbs Bulb No WType
Exterior
Headlights
Low beam
High beam
9704
9005
55
60
A
B
Parking lights 5D
Front turn signal lights 21 E
Front fog lights*119 C
Tail and rear side marker
lights 5D
License plate lights 5D
Back-up lights 16 D
Side turn signal lights 5E*
2
Front side marker lights 5D
Rear turn signal lights 21 E
Interior
Interior lights/personal
lights 5D
Luggage compartment
light*15D
506
6-1. Specifications
Fuel information
■Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehicle has a fuel tank opening that
only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
■Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gas-
oline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of
gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Toyota dealer.
■Gasoline quality standards
●Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.A., Europe and Japan have devel-
oped a specification for fuel quality called the World-Wide Fuel Charter
(WWFC), which is expected to be applied worldwide.
●The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emis-
sion levels. In the U.S., category 4 has been adopted.
●The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets,
and improves customer satisfaction through better performance.
■Recommendation of the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
●Toyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives
to avoid the build-up of engine deposits.
●All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains minimum detergent additives to
clean and/or keep clean intake systems, per EPA’s lowest additives con-
centration program.
●Toyota strongly recommends the use of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For
more information on Top Tier Detergent Gasoline and a list of marketers,
please go to the official website www.toptiergas.com.
You must only use unleaded gasoline in your vehicle.
Select octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. Use
of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result
in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications
of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.
507
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
■Recommendation of the use of cleaner burning gasoline
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxy-
genates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in
many areas.
Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately
blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent
vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
■Non-recommendation of the use of blended gasoline
●If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure that it has an octane rating no
lower than 87.
●Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
■Non-recommendation of the use of gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methyl-
cyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel
containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely
affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If
this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.
●Use only gasoline containing up to 15%
ethanol.
DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline
that could contain more than 15% etha-
nol, including from any pump labeled
E30, E50, E85 (which are only some
examples of fuel containing more than
15% ethanol).
DO NOT use gasoline
containing more than 15%
ethanol.
(30% ethanol)
(50% ethanol)
(85% ethanol)
508
6-1. Specifications
■If your engine knocks
●Consult your Toyota dealer.
●You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while acceler-
ating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
NOTICE
■Notice on fuel quality
●Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be
damaged.
●Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic
converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.
●Do not use gasohol other than the type previously stated.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems.
●Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the
level previously stated will cause persistent heavy knocking.
At worst, this will lead to engine damage.
■Fuel-related poor driveability
If poor driveability is encountered after using a different type of fuel (poor hot
starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type
of fuel.
■When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint.
509
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire information
Typical tire symbols
Full-size tire
Compact spare tire
510
6-1. Specifications
Tire size (P. 512)
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the
tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube main-
tains the air pressure.
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked
“RADIAL” is a bias-ply tire.
Summer tires or all season tires (P. 388)
An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked
“M+S” is a summer tire.
Location of treadwear indicators (P. 384)
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) (P. 511)
Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the
strands which form the plies in a tire.
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 387)
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 504)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.
“TEMPORARY USE ONLY” (P. 470)
A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE
ONLY” molded on its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary
emergency use only.
511
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT symbol*
Tire Identification Number
(TIN)
Tire manufacturer's identifica-
tion mark
Tire size code
Manufacturer's optional tire
type code (3 or 4 letters)
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
*: The DOT symbol certifies
that the tire conforms to
applicable Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards.
512
6-1. Specifications
Tire size
■Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical tire size.
Tire use
(P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)
Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
Wheel diameter (inches)
Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)
Speed symbol
(alphabet with one letter)
■Tire dimensions
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter
513
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire section names
Bead
Sidewall
Shoulder
Tread
Belt
Inner liner
Reinforcing rubber
Carcass
Rim lines
Bead wires
Chafer
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations
issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota
vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as
you read this information.
■DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be
found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
514
6-1. Specifications
■Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a speci-
fied government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2)
times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions
of their use. Performance may differ significantly from the norm due
to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
■Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C,
and they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turn-
ing) traction.
515
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
■Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, represent-
ing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a speci-
fied indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure.
Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the labo-
ratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly
inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either sepa-
rately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire fail-
ure.
516
6-1. Specifications
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term Meaning
Cold tire inflation pres-
sure
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been
parked for three hours or more, or has not
been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under
that condition
Maximum inflation
pressure
The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a
tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of
the tire
Recommended infla-
tion pressure Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a
manufacturer
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those stan-
dard items which may be replaced) of hybrid
transmission, power steering, power brakes,
power windows, power seats, radio and heater,
to the extent that these items are available as
factory-installed equipment (whether installed
or not)
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard
equipment, including the maximum capacity of
fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight optional
engine
Maximum loaded vehi-
cle weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
Normal occupant
weight
150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants
specified in the second column of Table 1* that
follows
Occupant distribution Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as speci-
fied in the third column of Table 1* below
517
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Production options
weight
The combined weight of installed regular pro-
duction options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in
excess of the standard items which they
replace, not previously considered in curb
weight or accessory weight, including heavy
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
battery, and special trim
Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are seated
Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter) Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation Rim diameter and width
Rim type designation The industry manufacturer's designation for a
rim by style or code
Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity
weight (Total load
capacity)
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb.
(68 kg) times the vehicle's designated seating
capacity
Vehicle maximum load
on the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined
by distributing to each axle its share of the
maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing
by two
Vehicle normal load
on the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined
by distributing to each axle its share of curb
weight, accessory weight, and normal occu-
pant weight (distributed in accordance with
Table 1* below), and dividing by two
Weather side The surface area of the rim not covered by the
inflated tire
Bead The part of the tire that is made of steel wires,
wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is
shaped to fit the rim
Tire related term Meaning
518
6-1. Specifications
Bead separation A breakdown of the bond between components
in the bead
Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles
substantially less than 90 degrees to the cen-
terline of the tread
Carcass The tire structure, except tread and sidewall
rubber which, when inflated, bears the load
Chunking The breaking away of pieces of the tread or
sidewall
Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire
Cord separation The parting of cords from adjacent rubber com-
pounds
Cracking Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or inner-
liner of the tire extending to cord material
CT
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire
and rim system in which the rim is designed
with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the
tire is designed to fit on the underside of the
rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges
inside the air cavity of the tire
Extra load tire A tire designed to operate at higher loads and
at higher inflation pressures than the corre-
sponding standard tire
Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs
Innerliner The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a
tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium
within the tire
Innerliner separation The parting of the innerliner from cord material
in the carcass
Tire related term Meaning
519
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Intended outboard
sidewall
(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufac-
turer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same
molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmet-
rical tire that has a particular side that must
always face outward when mounted on a
vehicle
Light truck (LT) tire A tire designated by its manufacturer as prima-
rily intended for use on lightweight trucks or
multipurpose passenger vehicles
Load rating The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry
for a given inflation pressure
Maximum load rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum per-
missible inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible
inflation pressure The maximum cold inflation pressure to which
a tire may be inflated
Measuring rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical
dimension requirements
Open splice Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or
innerliner that extends to cord material
Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
Overall width
The linear distance between the exteriors of
the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including eleva-
tions due to labeling, decorations, or protective
bands or ribs
Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars, mul-
tipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that
have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of
10,000 lb. or less.
Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
Tire related term Meaning
520
6-1. Specifications
Ply separation A parting of rubber compound between adja-
cent plies
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemi-
cals, fabric and steel or other materials, that,
when mounted on an automotive wheel, pro-
vides the traction and contains the gas or fluid
that sustains the load
Radial ply tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90
degrees to the centerline of the tread
Reinforced tire A tire designed to operate at higher loads and
at higher inflation pressures than the corre-
sponding standard tire
Section width
The linear distance between the exteriors of
the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding ele-
vations due to labeling, decoration, or protec-
tive bands
Sidewall That portion of a tire between the tread and
bead
Sidewall separation The parting of the rubber compound from the
cord material in the sidewall
Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or
greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-
1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when
using the snow traction test as described in
ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for
Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line
on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which
is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on at
least one sidewall
Test rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and
may be any rim listed as appropriate for use
with that tire
Tire related term Meaning
521
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
*:Table 1 Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load
for various designated seating capacities
Tread That portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road
Tread rib A tread section running circumferentially
around a tire
Tread separation Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
Treadwear indicators
(TWI)
The projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the
degrees of wear of the tread
Wheel-holding fixture The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire
assembly securely during testing
Designated seating
capacity, Number of
occupants
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants
Occupant distribution in
a normally loaded vehi-
cle
2 through 4 2 2 in front
5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second
seat
11 through 15 5 2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1
in fourth seat
16 through 20 7 2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1
in fourth seat
Tire related term Meaning
522
6-2. Customization
Customizable features
Customizable Features
Vehicles with a Display Audio system: Settings that can be
changed using the Display Audio system
(For further information on customizing settings using the Display
Audio system, refer to the “Display Audio System Owner’s Man-
ual”.)
Settings that can be changed by your Toyota dealer
Definition of symbols: O = Available, — = Not available
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be per-
sonalized to suit your preferences. Programming these preferences
requires specialized equipment and may be performed by your
Toyota dealer.
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions
being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer for further details.
523
6-2. Customization
6
Vehicle specifications
Item Function Default set-
ting
Customized
setting
Vehicle
Proximity
Notifica-
tion Sys-
tem
(P. 25)
The volume of
Vehicle Proxim-
ity Notification
System sound
Level 1
Level 2
—O
Level 3
Smart key
system*1
and wire-
less remote
control
(P. 47,
61)
Operation sig-
nal
(Emergency
flashers)
On Off — O
Operation sig-
nal
(Buzzer)
On Off — O
Operation
buzzer volume Level 7 Off to level 7 O O
Time elapsed
before auto-
matic door lock
function is acti-
vated if door is
not opened
after being
unlocked
60 seconds
30 seconds
—O
120 seconds
Open door
warning buzzer On Off — O
Automatic door
lock function to
be activated if
door is not
opened after
being unlocked
On Off — O
524
6-2. Customization
Smart key
system*1
(P. 47)
Smart key sys-
tem On Off — O
Number of per-
missible times
of continuous
smart lock
Twice Unlimited — O
Wireless
remote
control
(P. 61)
Wireless
remote control On Off — O
Unlocking
operation
Driver's door
unlocked in
one step, all
doors
unlocked in
two steps
All doors
unlocked in
one step.
OO
Panic function On Off — O
Item Function Default set-
ting
Customized
setting
525
6-2. Customization
6
Vehicle specifications
Door lock
(P. 65)
Unlocking
using a key
Driver's door
unlocked in
one step, all
doors
unlocked in
two steps
All doors
unlocked in
one step.
—O
Speed-detect-
ing automatic
door lock func-
tion*2
Off On O O
Opening
driver's door
unlocks all
doors
Off On — O
Shifting gears
to P unlocks all
doors.
On Off O O
Shifting gears
to position
other than P
locks all doors.
On Off O O
Lights
(P. 204)
Daytime run-
ning light sys-
tem (except
Canada)
On Off O O
Item Function Default set-
ting
Customized
setting
526
6-2. Customization
Illumination
(P. 321)
Time elapsed
before lights
turn off
15 seconds 7.5 seconds — O
30 seconds — O
Operation
when the doors
are unlocked
On Off — O
Operation after
the engine
switch is turned
to the “LOCK”
position*3
On Off — O
Operation after
the “POWER”
switch is turned
off*2
On Off — O
Operation
when you
approach the
vehicle with the
electronic key
on your per-
son*2
On Off — O
Seat belt
reminder
(P. 439)
Vehicle speed
linked seat belt
reminder
buzzer
On Off — O
Item Function Default set-
ting
Customized
setting
528
6-2. Customization
Items to initialize
Item When to initialize Reference
Maintenance data
(except Canada) After the maintenance is performed P. 353
Tire pressure warning
system
• When rotating the tires on vehicles
with differing front and rear tire
inflation pressures
• When changing tire pressure (such
as when changing traveling speed,
load weight, etc.)
• When changing the tire size
P. 385
The following items must be initialized for normal system operation
after such cases as the 12-volt battery being reconnected, or mainte-
nance being performed on the vehicle:
530
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free:
1-800-331-4331).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA can-
not become involved in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA,
1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
531
7
For owners
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité
●Déroulez la sangle diagonale
de telle sorte qu'elle passe
bien sur l'épaule, sans pour
autant être en contact avec le
cou ou glisser de l'épaule.
●Placez la sangle abdominale
le plus bas possible sur les
hanches.
●Réglez la position du dossier
de siège. Asseyez-vous le dos
le plus droit possible et calez-
vous bien dans le siège.
●Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de
sécurité.
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions
extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in
English.
532
Entretien et soin
ATTENTION
■Lorsque vous utilisez ou rangez la ceinture de sécurité du siège
central arrière
■Ceintures de sécurité
Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d'eau savonneuse tiède.
Profitez de l'occasion pour vérifier régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont
pas effilochées, entaillées, ou ne paraissent pas exagérément usées.
ATTENTION
■Détérioration et usure des ceintures de sécurité
Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu'elles ne
sont pas entaillées, effilochées, et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas
desserrés. N'utilisez pas une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse avant qu'elle
ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse n'apporte aucune
garantie de protection de l'occupant en cas d'accident.
●N’utilisez pas la ceinture de sécurité du
siège arrière central lorsque l’une des
boucles est détachée.
Si vous n’attachez qu’une des boucles,
il y a risque de blessures graves voire
mortelles en cas de freinage brusque
ou de collision.
533
7
For owners
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions
extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual.
See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag
instructions in English.
Coussins gonflables frontaux SRS
Le coussin gonflable conducteur/le coussin gonflable passager
avant SRS
Participent à la protection de la tête et du thorax du conducteur
et du passager avant contre les chocs contre les éléments de
l'habitacle.
Coussin gonflable SRS de genoux du conducteur
Participent à la protection du conducteur.
534
Coussins gonflables latéraux et rideau SRS
Coussins gonflables latéraux SRS
Participent à la protection du torse des passagers avant.
Coussins gonflables rideau SRS
Participent principalement à la protection de la tête des
occupants assis aux places extérieures.
Autres coussins gonflables SRS
Coussins gonflables d'assise SRS
Participent à la protection du conducteur et du passager avant.
535
7
For owners
Composants du système de coussins gonflables SRS
Coussins gonflables rideau
Témoin d’alerte SRS et
témoins indicateurs “AIR
BAG ON” et “AIR BAG
OFF”
Coussins gonflables
latéraux
Capteurs d’impact latéral
(arrière)
Coussin gonflable d'assise
passager avant
Contacteur de boucle de
ceinture de sécurité du
siège passager avant
Coussin gonflable
conducteur
Contacteur de boucle de
ceinture de sécurité
conducteur
Coussin gonflable d'assise
conducteur
Capteurs d'impact latéral
(avant)
Prétensionneurs de
ceintures de sécurité et
limiteurs de force
Capteurs d'impact latéral
(porte avant)
536
Votre véhicule est équipé de COUSSINS GONFLABLES
INTELLIGENTS conçus selon les normes de sécurité américaines
applicables aux véhicules à moteur (FMVSS208). Le boîtier
électronique (ECU) des coussins gonflables régule le déploiement
des coussins gonflables sur la base des informations qu’il reçoit des
capteurs, etc., indiqués ci-dessus dans le schéma illustrant les
composants du système. Parmi ces informations figurent la gravité
du choc et l’occupation du véhicule par les passagers. Le
déploiement rapide des coussins gonflables est obtenu au moyen
d’une réaction chimique dans les dispositifs pyrotechniques, qui
produit un gaz inoffensif permettant d’amortir le mouvement des
occupants.
Coussin gonflable de
genoux du conducteur
Système de classification
de l’occupant du siège
passager avant (ECU et
capteurs)
Boîtier électronique de
coussins gonflables
Capteurs d’impact avant
Coussin gonflable passager
avant
537
7
For owners
ATTENTION
■Précautions concernant les coussins gonflables SRS
Respectez les précautions suivantes concernant les coussins gonflables
SRS.
Autrement, des blessures graves, voire mortelles, pourraient s’ensuivre.
●Le conducteur et tous les passagers du véhicule doivent porter
correctement leur ceinture de sécurité.
Les coussins gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs supplémentaires à
utiliser avec les ceintures de sécurité.
●Le coussin gonflable SRS conducteur se déploie avec une violence
considérable, qui peut causer des blessures graves, voire mortelles, si le
conducteur se trouve très près du coussin gonflable. L’autorité fédérale
chargée de la sécurité routière aux États-Unis (NHTSA) conseille:
Sachant que la zone de danger pour le coussin gonflable conducteur se
trouve dans les premiers 2 à 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) de déploiement, vous
placer à 10 in. (250 mm) de votre coussin gonflable conducteur vous
garantit une marge de sécurité suffisante. Cette distance est à mesurer
entre le centre du volant et le sternum. Si vous êtes assis à moins de 10
in. (250 mm), vous pouvez changer votre position de conduite de plusieurs
façons:
• Reculez votre siège le plus possible, de manière à pouvoir encore
atteindre confortablement les pédales.
• Inclinez légèrement le dossier du siège. Bien que les véhicules
puissent être différents les uns des autres, la plupart des conducteurs
peuvent s'asseoir à une distance de 10 in. (250 mm), même avec le
siège conducteur complètement avancé, simplement en inclinant un
peu le dossier de siège. Si vous avez des difficultés à voir la route
après avoir incliné votre siège, utilisez un coussin ferme et
antidérapant pour vous rehausser ou, si votre véhicule est équipé du
réglage en hauteur du siège, remontez-le.
• Si votre volant est réglable, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela a pour effet
d’orienter le coussin gonflable en direction de votre poitrine plutôt que
de votre tête et de votre cou.
Réglez votre siège selon ces recommandations de la NHTSA, tout en
conservant le contrôle des pédales, du volant et la vue des commandes
du tableau de bord.
538
ATTENTION
■Précautions concernant les coussins gonflables SRS
●Le coussin gonflable SRS passager avant se déploie également avec une
violence considérable, qui peut causer des blessures graves, voire
mortelles, si le passager avant se trouve très près du coussin gonflable.
Éloignez le siège du passager avant au maximum du coussin gonflable et
réglez le dossier de siège de façon à être assis bien droit dans le siège.
●Les nourrissons et les enfants qui ne sont pas correctement assis et/ou
protégés peuvent être grièvement blessés ou tués par le déploiement d’un
coussin gonflable. Installez dans un siège de sécurité enfant les
nourrissons et les enfants trop petits pour pouvoir utiliser la ceinture de
sécurité. Toyota recommande vivement que les nourrissons et les jeunes
enfants soient installés sur les sièges arrière du véhicule et
convenablement attachés. Les sièges arrière sont plus sûrs pour les
nourrissons et les enfants que le siège du passager avant.
●N’installez jamais un siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route sur le
siège du passager avant, même si le témoin indicateur “AIR BAG OFF” est
allumé. En cas d'accident, le déploiement du coussin gonflable passager
avant et du coussin gonflable d'assise passager avant est si rapide et
violent que l'enfant risquerait d'être blessé grièvement, voire mortellement,
si le siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route est installé sur le siège
passager avant.
●Si vous attachez une rallonge de
ceinture de sécurité aux boucles de
ceinture de sécurité avant, mais pas au
pêne de la ceinture de sécurité, les
coussins gonflables avant SRS
détectent que le conducteur et le
passager avant ont attaché leur
ceinture de sécurité, alors même que
ce n’est pas le cas. Dans ce cas, il se
peut que les coussins gonflables avant
SRS ne se déploient pas correctement
en cas de collision et vous risquez
d’être tué ou grièvement blessé. Veillez
à porter la ceinture de sécurité avec la
rallonge de ceinture de sécurité.
539
7
For owners
ATTENTION
■Précautions concernant les coussins gonflables SRS
●Ne pas s'asseoir sur le bord du siège et
ne pas s'appuyer contre la planche de
bord.
●Ne laissez pas un enfant rester debout
devant le coussin gonflable SRS
passager avant ou bien s’asseoir sur
les genoux du passager avant.
●Ne laissez pas les occupants des
sièges avant voyager avec un objet sur
les genoux.
●Ne vous appuyez pas contre la porte,
contre le rail latéral de toit ou contre les
montants avant, latéraux et arrière.
●Interdisez à quiconque de s'agenouiller
sur le siège passager en appui contre
la porte ou de sortir la tête ou les mains
à l'extérieur du véhicule.
540
ATTENTION
■Précautions concernant les coussins gonflables SRS
●Ne suspendez aucun cintre ou objets durs aux crochets à vêtements. En
cas de déploiement des coussins gonflables rideau SRS, tous ces objets
pourraient se transformer en projectiles et causer des blessures graves,
voire mortelles.
●Si un cache en vinyle recouvre la partie où le coussin gonflable SRS de
genoux du conducteur se déploie, veillez à l'enlever.
●Ne fixez ni ne posez aucun objet sur le
tableau de bord, la garniture du volant
de direction et la partie inférieure du
tableau de bord.
Au déploiement des coussins
gonflables SRS conducteur, passager
avant et de genoux du conducteur, ces
objets risquent de se transformer en
projectiles.
●Ne rien fixer aux portes, à la vitre de
pare-brise, aux vitres latérales, aux
montants avant et arrière, au rail latéral
de toit et à la poignée de maintien.
●Véhicules dépourvus de système
d'accès et de démarrage “mains libres”:
N’attachez pas à la clé d'objets lourds,
pointus ou très durs, comme d’autres
clés et accessoires. Ces objets risquent
d'entraver le déploiement du coussin
gonflable de genoux SRS du
conducteur ou d'être projetés vers le
siège conducteur par la force de
déploiement, constituant ainsi un
danger potentiel.
541
7
For owners
ATTENTION
■Précautions concernant les coussins gonflables SRS
●N'utilisez aucun accessoire de siège venant recouvrir les zones de
déploiement des coussins gonflables latéraux SRS et des coussins
gonflables d'assise SRS, car il risquerait d'en gêner le déploiement. De
tels accessoires peuvent empêcher les coussins gonflables latéraux et
coussins gonflables d'assise de fonctionner correctement, désactiver le
dispositif ou entraîner le déploiement accidentel des coussins gonflables
latéraux et d'assise, entraînant la mort ou des blessures graves.
●Ne faites pas subir de chocs ou de pressions excessives à la zone
renfermant les composants de coussin gonflable SRS.
En effet, cela pourrait entraîner un fonctionnement anormal des coussins
gonflables SRS.
●Ne touchez aucun composant du système immédiatement après le
déploiement (gonflage) des coussins gonflables SRS, car ils peuvent être
chauds.
●Si vous avez des difficultés à respirer après le déploiement des coussins
gonflables SRS, ouvrez une porte ou une vitre pour faire entrer de l’air
frais, ou bien descendez du véhicule si cela ne présente pas de danger.
Essuyez tout résidu dès que possible afin d’éviter d’éventuelles irritations
de la peau.
●Si les parties renfermant les coussins gonflables SRS, telles que la
garniture du volant et les garnitures de montants avant et arrière, sont
abîmées ou craquelées, faites-les remplacer par votre concessionnaire
Toyota.
●Ne disposez rien sur le siège du passager avant, comme par exemple un
coussin. Cela aurait pour conséquence de répartir le poids du passager
sur toute la surface du siège, ce qui empêche le capteur de détecter
correctement le poids du passager. Il en résulte que les coussins
gonflables avant SRS du passager avant risquent de ne pas se déployer
en cas de collision.
542
ATTENTION
■Modification et mise au rebut des éléments du système de coussins
gonflables SRS
Consultez votre concessionnaire Toyota avant de mettre votre véhicule au
rebut ou de procéder à l'une des modifications suivantes. Les coussins
gonflables SRS peuvent être défaillants ou se déployer (se gonfler)
accidentellement, provoquant la mort ou de graves blessures.
●Installation, dépose, démontage et réparations des coussins gonflables
SRS.
●Réparations, modifications, démontage ou remplacement du volant, du
tableau de bord, de la planche de bord, des sièges ou de leur garniture,
des montants avant, latéraux et arrière ou des rails latéraux de toit.
●Réparations ou modifications des ailes avant, du pare-choc avant ou des
flancs de l'habitacle.
●Installation d’un protège-calandre (pare-buffle, pare-kangourou, etc.), de
chasse-neiges ou de treuils.
●Modification du système de suspension du véhicule.
●Installation d'appareils électroniques, tels qu'un radioémetteur/récepteur
ou d'un lecteur CD.
●Aménagements du véhicule visant à permettre sa conduite par une
personne atteinte d'un handicap physique.
544
Abbreviation list
Abbreviation/Acronym list
ABBREVIATIONS MEANING
A/C Air Conditioning
ABS Anti-lock Brake System
ACC Accessory
ALR Automatic Locking Retractor
CRS Child Restraint System
DISP Display
ECU Electronic Control Unit
EDR Event Data Recorder
ELR Emergency Locking Retractor
EPS Electric Power Steering
EV Electric Vehicle
GAWR Gross Axle Weight Ratings
GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
I/M Emission inspection and maintenance
LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
LED Light Emitting Diode
M + S Mud + Snow
MMT Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
MTBE Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether
OBD On Board Diagnostics
SRS Supplemental Restraint System
545
Abbreviation list
TIN Tire Identification Number
TPMS Tire Pressure Warning System
TRAC Traction Control
TWI Treadwear Indicators
VIN Vehicle Identification Number
VSC Vehicle Stability Control
ABBREVIATIONS MEANING
546
Alphabetical index
Alphabetical index
A/C.............................................238
ABS ...........................................221
Air conditioning filter...............399
Air conditioning system
Air conditioning filter..............399
Automatic air conditioning
system ................................238
Airbags
Airbag operating
conditions............................120
Airbag precautions for
your child ............................125
Airbag warning light...............438
Curtain shield airbag
operating conditions............121
Curtain shield airbag
precautions .........................125
Front passenger occupant
classification system...........130
General airbag
precautions .........................125
Indicators...............................130
Knee airbag precautions.......125
Locations of airbags..............116
Modification and
disposal of airbags..............129
Proper driving
posture........................114, 125
Seat cushion airbag
precautions .........................125
Side airbag operating
conditions............................121
Side airbag precautions ........125
SRS airbags..........................116
Antenna ....................................255
Anti-lock brake system ...........221
Assist grips ..............................340
Audio input...............268, 276, 287
Audio system
Antenna.................................255
Audio input............268, 276, 287
AUX port ...............................287
CD player..............................256
Cord hook .............................272
iPod.......................................268
MP3/WMA disc .....................261
Optimal use...........................284
Portable music
player..................268, 276, 287
Radio.....................................254
Steering wheel audio
switch..................................288
Type......................................248
USB memory.........................276
USB port ...............................276
Automatic air conditioning
system
Air conditioning filter..............399
Automatic air conditioning
system ................................238
AUX port ...................................287
Auxiliary boxes ........................327
A
547
Alphabetical index
Back door................................... 71
Back-up lights
Replacing light bulbs ............ 415
Wattage................................ 505
Battery
Checking .............................. 379
Hybrid battery
(traction battery)................... 29
If the vehicle 12-volt
battery is discharged.......... 481
Preparing and checking
before winter ...................... 231
Bluetooth® audio
Bluetooth® audio .................. 291
Portable player ..................... 300
Set up................................... 308
Using the Bluetooth®
audio .................................. 295
Bluetooth® phone
Making a phone call ............. 303
Set up................................... 314
Bottle holders.......................... 330
Brake
Fluid...................................... 503
Parking brake....................... 179
Brake assist............................. 221
Break-in tips ............................ 151
Care
Exterior..................................346
Interior...................................349
Seat belts ..............................349
Cargo capacity .........................226
CD player ..................................256
Chains.......................................231
Child-protectors.........................67
Child restraint system
Booster seats, definition........136
Booster seats, installation .....140
Convertible seats,
definition .............................136
Convertible seats,
installation...........................140
Front passenger occupant
classification system...........130
Infant seat, definition.............136
Infant seats, installation.........140
Installing CRS with
LATCH system....................141
Installing CRS with
seat belts ............................142
Installing CRS with
top tether straps..................146
B
C
548
Alphabetical index
Child safety
Airbag precautions................125
Child-protectors.......................67
Child restraint system............136
How your child should
wear the seat belt .................88
Installing child restraints........140
Moon roof precautions ..........104
Power window lock switch.......98
Power window precautions ...100
Removed key battery
precautions .........................403
Seat belt extender
precautions ...........................92
Seat belt precautions ..............89
Seat heater precautions........338
12-volt battery
precautions.................381, 486
Cleaning
Exterior..................................346
Interior...................................349
Seat belts ..............................349
Clock .........................................189
Coat hooks ...............................339
Condenser ................................375
Console box .............................325
Cooling system
Hybrid system overheating ...487
Cord hook.................................272
Cruise control ..........................217
Cup holders..............................329
Curtain shield airbags.............116
Customizable features ............522
Daytime running light
system....................................206
Defogger
Rear window .........................247
Side mirrors...........................247
Dimension ................................496
Dinghy towing..........................236
Display
Energy flow .............................35
Multi-information display .......187
Trip information.....................187
Warning message.................447
Do-it-yourself maintenance ....360
D
549
Alphabetical index
Doors
Back door ............................... 71
Door lock .................... 47, 61, 65
Door windows......................... 98
Rear door child protector........ 67
Side doors .............................. 65
Side mirrors............................ 96
Driver’s seat belt reminder
light ........................................ 439
Driving
Break-in tips ......................... 151
Correct posture..................... 114
Procedures........................... 150
Winter driving tips................. 231
Eco drive mode ....................... 176
Electric power steering........... 221
Electronic key
If the electronic key does
not operate properly........... 479
Emergency flashers
Switch................................... 428
Emergency, in case of
If a warning buzzer
sounds ............................... 437
If a warning light
turns on.............................. 437
If a warning message is
displayed............................ 447
If the electronic key does
not operate properly........... 479
If the hybrid system will
not start.............................. 475
If the shift lever cannot
be shifted from P................ 477
If the vehicle becomes
stuck................................... 492
If the vehicle 12-volt
battery is discharged.......... 481
If you have a flat tire .............463
If you lose your keys .............478
If you think something is
wrong..................................436
If your vehicle has to
be stopped in an
emergency..........................493
If your vehicle needs to
be towed .............................429
If your vehicle overheats.......487
Engine
Compartment ........................368
Engine switch................160, 164
Hood......................................364
How to start the hybrid
system ........................160, 164
Identification number.............497
If the hybrid system will
not start...............................475
Ignition switch................160, 164
Overheating...........................487
“POWER” switch ...................164
Engine coolant
Capacity ................................500
Checking ...............................373
Preparing and checking
before winter .......................231
E
550
Alphabetical index
Engine oil
Capacity ................................499
Checking ...............................369
Preparing and checking
before winter.......................231
Engine/power control unit
coolant
Capacity ................................500
Checking ...............................373
Preparing and checking
before winter.......................231
Engine switch...................160, 164
EPS............................................221
EV drive mode..........................172
Event data recorder ...................18
Exclusive jump
starting terminal ....................481
Floor mat...................................341
Fluid
Brake.....................................503
Washer..................................378
Fog lights
Replacing light bulbs.............415
Switch....................................208
Wattage.................................505
Front fog lights
Replacing light bulbs.............415
Switch....................................208
Wattage.................................505
Front passenger occupant
classification system ............130
Front passenger’s seat
belt reminder light.................439
Front seats
Adjustment..............................76
Front side marker lights
Replacing light bulbs.............415
Switch ...................................204
Wattage.................................505
Front turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs.............415
Switch ...................................178
Wattage.................................505
Fuel
Capacity................................498
Fuel gauge............................181
Gas station information.........560
Information............................506
Refueling...............................105
Type......................................498
Fuel door ..................................105
Fuel filler door..........................105
Fuses ........................................404
Gas station information ..........560
Gauges......................................181
Glove box .................................325
Hazard lights
Switch ...................................428
Head restraints
Adjusting ................................81
Headlights
Replacing light bulbs.............415
Switch ...................................204
Wattage.................................505
F
G
H
551
Alphabetical index
Heaters
Seat heaters......................... 337
Side mirrors.......................... 247
Hill-start assist control ........... 221
Hood......................................... 364
Horn.......................................... 180
Hybrid system
Emergency shut off system.... 30
Energy monitor/
consumption screen............. 35
High voltage components....... 29
Hybrid system indicator........ 197
“POWER” switch .................. 164
Vehicle Proximity
Notification System .............. 25
I/M test...................................... 359
Identification
Engine .................................. 498
Tire ....................................... 509
Vehicle.................................. 497
Ignition switch................. 160, 164
Illuminated entry system........ 323
Immobilizer system................. 110
Indicator lights ........................ 184
Initialization
Items to initialize................... 528
Inside rear view mirror.............. 94
Interior lights
Switch................................... 322
Wattage................................ 505
iPod .......................................... 268
Jack
Positioning a floor jack ......... 366
Vehicle-equipped jack .......... 463
Jack handle.............................. 463
Keyless entry..............................61
Keys
Electronic key..........................44
Engine switch................160, 164
If the electronic key does
not operate properly............479
If you lose your keys .............478
Ignition switch................160, 164
Key battery............................401
Key number.............................44
Keyless entry...........................61
Keys ........................................44
Mechanical key .......................44
“POWER” switch ...................164
Wireless remote control
key ........................................61
Knee airbag ..............................116
License plate lights
Replacing light bulbs.............415
Wattage.................................505
Light bulbs
Replacing ..............................415
Wattage.................................505
Lights
Emergency flasher switch .....428
Fog light switch .....................208
Hazard light switch................428
Headlight switch....................204
Instrument panel light
switch..................................204
Interior lights switch...............322
Parking light switch ...............204
Personal light switch .............322
Replacing light bulbs.............415
Side marker light switch ........204
Tail light switch......................204
Turn signal lever....................178
Wattage.................................505
Load capacity...........................230
Lock steering column......162, 168
I
J
K
L
552
Alphabetical index
Luggage compartment light
Wattage.................................505
Luggage cover .........................343
Maintenance
Do-it-yourself
maintenance .......................360
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs.............................359
General maintenance............355
Maintenance data..................496
Maintenance requirements....352
Meter
Instrument panel light
control.................................182
Meters ...................................181
Microphone...............................296
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror.............94
Outside rear view mirror
defogger..............................247
Outside rear view mirrors........96
Vanity mirrors........................333
Moon roof .................................101
MP3 disc ...................................261
Multi-information display ........187
Noise from under vehicle..........16
Odometer..................................189
Oil
Engine oil ..............................369
Opener
Back door................................71
Fuel filler door .......................105
Hood .....................................364
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjusting and folding...............96
Defogger ...............................247
Outside temperature
display....................................334
Overheating, Hybrid
system....................................487
Parking brake...........................179
Parking lights
Replacing light bulbs.............415
Switch ...................................204
Wattage.................................505
Personal lights
Switch ...................................322
Wattage.................................505
Power outlet .............................336
“POWER” switch .....................164
Power windows..........................98
M
N
O
P
553
Alphabetical index
Radiator.................................... 375
Radio ........................................ 254
Rear seat
Folding down.......................... 77
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs ............ 415
Wattage................................ 505
Rear window defogger............ 247
Rear window wiper.................. 214
Reset the maintenance data... 353
Replacing
Fuses.................................... 404
Key battery ........................... 401
Light bulbs............................ 415
Tires ..................................... 463
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners ..................... 530
Seat belts
Adjusting the seat belt.............84
Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR).....................88
Child restraint system
installation...........................140
Cleaning and maintaining
the seat belts ......................349
Emergency Locking
Retractor (ELR).................... 88
How to wear your seat belt......84
How your child should
wear the seat belt .................88
Pregnant women,
proper seat belt use..............90
Reminder light.......................439
Seat belt extenders .................89
Seat belt pretensioners ...........88
Seat cushion airbag.................116
Seat heaters..............................337
Seating capacity.......................230
R
S
554
Alphabetical index
Seats
Adjustment ..............................76
Adjustment precautions...........76
Child seats/child
restraint system
installation...........................140
Cleaning................................349
Front seat adjustment .............76
Front seat adjustment
precautions ...........................76
Head restraint..........................81
Properly sitting in the seat.....114
Seat heaters..........................337
Service reminder
indicators ...............................184
Shift lever
If the shift lever cannot
be shifted from P.................477
Transmission.........................175
Shift lock system .....................477
Side airbags..............................116
Side marker lights
Replacing light bulbs.............415
Wattage.................................505
Side mirror
Adjusting and folding...............96
Defogger ...............................247
Smart key system
Entry function..........................47
Starting the hybrid
system ........................160, 164
Spare tire
Inflation pressure ..................504
Storage location....................463
Spark plug ................................501
Specifications ..........................496
Speedometer............................181
Steering
Column lock release .....162, 168
Steering wheel
Adjustment..............................93
Audio switches......................288
Stop lights
Replacing light bulbs.............415
Wattage.................................505
Storage feature ........................324
Storage precautions................228
Stuck
If the vehicle becomes
stuck ...................................492
Sun visors ................................332
555
Alphabetical index
Switch
Cruise control ....................... 217
“ECO MODE” switch ............ 176
Emergency flasher switch .... 428
EV drive mode switch........... 172
Engine switch ............... 160, 164
Fog light switch..................... 208
Hazard light switch ............... 428
Headlight switch................... 204
Ignition switch............... 160, 164
Light switches....................... 204
Power door lock switch........... 65
“POWER” switch .................. 164
Power window switch ............. 98
Rear window wiper and
washer switch .................... 214
Steering wheel audio
switches ............................. 288
Window lock switch ................ 98
Wiper and washer ........ 210, 214
Tail lights
Replacing light bulbs ............ 415
Switch................................... 204
Wattage................................ 505
Theft deterrent system
Immobilizer system............... 110
Theft prevention labels......... 113
Theft prevention labels........... 113
Tire inflation pressure ............ 392
Tire information
Glossary ............................... 516
Size ...................................... 512
Tire identification number..... 511
Uniform tire quality
grading............................... 513
Tires
Chains...................................231
Checking ...............................384
If you have a flat tire..............463
Inflation pressure...................392
Inflation pressure sensor.......385
Information ............................509
Replacing ..............................463
Rotating tires.........................384
Size .......................................504
Snow tires .............................231
Spare tire...............................463
Tire pressure warning
system ........................384, 439
Tools .........................................463
Total load capacity...................230
Towing
Dinghy towing........................236
Emergency towing.................431
Trailer towing.........................235
TRAC.........................................221
Traction control........................221
Transmission
Hybrid transmission...............175
If the shift lever cannot
be shifted from P.................477
Trip information .......................187
Trip meter .................................181
Turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs.............415
Switch....................................178
Wattage.................................505
USB memory ....................268, 276
T
U
556
Alphabetical index
Vanity mirrors...........................333
Vehicle data recordings ............18
Vehicle identification
number ...................................497
Vehicle Proximity Notification
System ....................................25
Vehicle stability control...........221
VSC............................................221
Warning buzzers
Brake system ........................437
Electric power steering
system ................................438
Key reminder.........................455
Master warning......................439
Seat belt reminder.................439
Warning lights
Anti-lock brake system..........438
Brake assist system ..............438
Brake system ........................437
Charging system ...................438
Electric power steering
system ................................438
Front passenger occupant
classification system...........438
Low brake fluid......................437
Low fuel level ........................439
Low tire inflation pressure.....439
Malfunction indicator lamp ....438
Master warning light..............439
Pretensioners........................438
Seat belt reminder light.........439
Slip indicator light..................438
SRS airbag system ...............438
Tire pressure.........................439
Tire pressure warning
system ................................439
Warning messages
Back door..............................450
Cruise control........................449
EV drive mode ......................450
Hybrid system .......................448
Hybrid system overheat........450
Maintenance .........................450
Moon roof..............................450
N position..............................450
Open door.............................450
P position ..............................450
Parking brake........................450
Smart key system .........449, 455
Traction battery.....................450
Washer
Checking...............................378
Preparing and checking
before winter.......................231
Switch ...........................210, 214
Washing and waxing ...............346
Weight
Cargo capacity......................226
Load limits.............................230
Weight...................................496
Wheels ......................................396
Window lock switch...................98
V
W
557
Alphabetical index
Windows
Power windows ...................... 98
Rear window defogger ......... 247
Washer......................... 210, 214
Windshield wipers................... 210
Wireless remote control key
Replacing the key battery..... 401
Wireless remote control.......... 61
WMA disc................................. 261
558
What to do if...
What to do if...
A tire punctures
P. 463 If you have a flat tire
The hybrid system does not start
P. 475 If the hybrid system will not start
P. 110 Immobilizer system
P. 481 If the vehicle 12-volt battery is dis-
charged
The shift lever cannot be
moved out
P. 477 If the shift lever cannot be shifted
from P
The engine coolant temperature
warning light flashes or comes on
Steam can be seen coming
from under the hood
P. 487 If your vehicle overheats
The key is lost
P. 478 If you lose your keys
The 12-volt battery runs out
P. 481 If the vehicle 12-volt battery is dis-
charged
The doors cannot be locked
P. 65 Side doors
P. 71 Back door
The vehicle is stuck in
mud or sand
P. 492 If the vehicle becomes stuck
A warning light or indicator light
comes on
P. 437 If a warning light turns on or a
warning buzzer sounds
559
What to do if...
■Warning lights
P. 438
or
P. 437 P. 438
P. 438 P. 438
or P. 439
P. 438
P. 439
P. 438
P. 439
or P. 439
P. 438
*: Slip indicator comes on.
Brake system warning
light
(red indicator)
Electric power steering system
warning light
Slip indicator light*
Charging system warning
light
Brake system warning light
(yellow indicator)
Malfunction indicator
lamp
Low fuel level warning
light
Driver’s and front pas-
senger’s seat belt
reminder light
SRS warning light
Master warning light
ABS warning light
Tire pressure warning
light
560
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Fuel filler door opener
P. 105
Tire inflation pressure
P. 504
Hood lock release lever
P. 364
Auxiliary catch lever
P. 364
Fuel filler door
P. 105
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference) 9.5 gal. (36 L, 7.9 Imp. gal.)
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87
(Research Octane Number 91) or higher
Cold tire inflation
pressure P. 504
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill
reference)
qt. (L, Imp. qt.)
With filter 3.9 (3.7, 3.3)
Without filter 3.6 (3.4, 3.0)
Engine oil type
Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalent
Oil grade: P. 499
ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil
Recommended oil viscosity:
SAE 0W-20
